JP2020022783A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.SOLUTION: When the rate of the number of put out game balls to the number of shot game balls is defined as a ball putout rate, a game machine can execute n types of ball entry assisting modes (n is an integer of 2 or more) with different ball putout rates. As one of the n types of ball entry assisting modes, at least a game ball decreasing mode in which the ball putout rate is less than 1 and a game ball increasing mode in which the ball putout rate exceeds 1 can be executed. When the ball putout rate during execution of the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) ball entry assisting mode is defined as Mi, and the rate in which the i-th entry assisting mode is executed is defined as Pi that occupies when the ball entry assisting mode is executed, a specific formula is satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and production for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-172988 A

  In the above-described gaming machines, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest in the games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following embodiments.

[Form]
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A ball entry section into which the launched game balls can enter,
Execution means for executing a ball entry assist mode for assisting entry of a game ball into the entry section,
Payout means for paying out game balls as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section,
A gaming machine comprising:
The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means is defined as a throwing rate. If you do
The execution means,
N types (n is an integer of 2 or more) of ball entry assist modes having different throwing rates can be executed,
As one of the n types of entry assist modes, at least a game ball decreasing mode in which the throwing rate is less than 1 and a game ball increasing mode in which the throwing rate exceeds 1 can be executed. ,
The exit rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entry assist mode is executed is defined as Mi,
When the ratio of the execution of the i-th ball entry assist mode to the execution of the ball entry assist mode is defined as Pi,
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized by being configured to satisfy the following.

  According to the above embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine as one embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a jackpot lottery etc. It is an explanatory view explaining a success / failure table stored in a success / failure table storage area. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating contents of a distribution table set in the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows a game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a display continuation time. It is an explanatory view showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the shift processing at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric role support. It is a flowchart which shows an electric-power opening / closing process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a time chart which shows an example of the already-viewed notice performed by the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image displayed on a symbol display device, when the already-viewed notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in a sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command correspondence process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command correspondence process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the already-viewed feeling notice process. It is a flow chart which shows a feeling of notice notice generation lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the effect corresponding to the already-viewed notice. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a change start. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is a time chart which shows an example which increases the number of the effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times with the passage of time. It is a time chart which shows an example of the already-viewed notice performed by the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of an already-visited notice performed by the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display surface at the time of the already-viewed notice being performed by the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the already-viewed notice performed by the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the process performed in the main control apparatus and audio | voice light emission control apparatus of a pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the already noticed notice performed by the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow at the time of a pachinko machine selecting the button effect XA as an effect element for an already noticed notice and executing the button effect XA twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production mode XA1, XA2 performed in the button production XA, and the suggestion production F. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XA is executed as the effect element for the already-viewed notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow at the time of a pachinko machine selecting the button effect XB as an effect element for a feeling notice and performing the button effect XB twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | presentation aspect XB1, XB2, XB3 performed in the button production XB, and the suggestion production F. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XB is executed as an effect element for the already-viewed notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow at the time of a pachinko machine selecting the button effect XC as an effect element for a noticed feeling notice, and executing the button effect XC twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production mode XC1, XC2 performed in the button production XC, and the suggestion production F. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XC is executed as the effect element for the already-viewed notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow at the time of a pachinko machine selecting the button effect XA as an effect element for the already-notified notice and executing the button effect XD twice. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the effect selection screen XD1, the effect mode XD2, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XD. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XD is executed as the effect element for the already-viewed notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow at the time of a pachinko machine selecting the button effect XE as an effect element for an already noticed notice, and performing the button effect XE twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect selection screen XE1, the effect mode XE2, and the suggestion effect F performed in the button effect XE. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XE is executed as the effect element for the already-viewed notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow at the time of a pachinko machine selecting the button effect XF as an effect element for an already-notified notice and executing the button effect XF twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production mode XF1, XF2 performed in button production XF, and the suggestion production F. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XF is executed as the effect element for the already-viewed notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow at the time of a pachinko machine selecting the button effect XG as an effect element for a noticed feeling notice, and performing the button effect XA twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production mode XG1, XG2 performed in the button production XG, and the suggestion production F. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XG is executed as an effect element for the already-viewed notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow at the time of a pachinko machine selecting the button effect XH as an effect element for a noticed feeling notice, and executing the button effect XH twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | presentation mode XH1, XH2, XH3 performed in the button production XH, and the suggestion production F. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of button production XH being performed as a production effect element for a feeling already notice. It is an explanatory view showing a game board of a pachinko machine of an eighth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd starting port unit with which the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd starting port unit when the 1st high frequency support mode is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd starting port unit when the 2nd high frequency support mode is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing for the starting mouth performed by the pachinko machine of an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the time of the end of opening and closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric role support performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric power opening / closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd starting port unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the locus | trajectory of a game ball when a game ball enters into the 2nd starting port unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the winning processing for the starting mouth performed by the pachinko machine of a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the time of the end of opening and closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric-power opening / closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a structure of the 2nd starting port unit typically. It is an explanatory view showing another example of composition of the 2nd starting port unit concretely. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd starting port unit in the case of winning the 1st kind electric utility machine opening in the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the timing which a game ball arrives at a through gate and an opening / closing ball-in device, and shows a control mode of an opening / closing door in a case where it is elected to open the 1st type electric utility. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start-up opening unit in the case of winning the 2nd kind of electric utility in the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the timing at which the game ball reached the through gate and the opening / closing ball-in device, and shows the control mode of the opening / closing door in the case where it was elected to open the second type electric utility. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the time of the end of opening and closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric role support performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric power opening / closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening and closing door in the 1st high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of an 11th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening and closing door in the 2nd high frequency support mode performed by the pachinko machine of the eleventh embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening and closing door in the 3rd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of an 11th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening and closing door in the low frequency support mode performed by the pachinko machine of the eleventh embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows a control mode of an opening and closing door when a fluctuation time of a general-purpose unit is set to 0.95 seconds during a high frequency support mode which a pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows a control mode of an opening and closing door when a fluctuating time of a general figure unit is set to 0.25 seconds during a high frequency support mode which a pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows a mode of control of an opening and closing door when a fluctuating time of a general figure unit is set to 0.05 second during a high frequency support mode which a pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view showing a variable time table for a high frequency support mode in a pachinko machine of a thirteenth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the increase / decrease of the game ball which a player has during the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
A3. Various processes executed in main controller:
A4. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
A5. Preliminary notice:
A5-1. Summary of the sighted notice:
A5-2. Control related to the already-notified notice:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. FIG. Fifth embodiment:
F. Sixth embodiment:
G. FIG. Seventh embodiment:
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M. Thirteenth embodiment:
N. Modification:
O. Regarding the invention groups extracted from the above embodiments:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) as one embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facilities of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged on a front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  At an approximate center of the front door frame 14, an open window 18 is formed. Around the window 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illuminated component is configured by light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of increasing the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time, big hit winning, reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. On the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as lent balls lent from a lending machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and the player can operate the lever 23 to switch between the closed state and the open state of the outlet 22. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, game balls fall from the discharge port 22, and the game balls are discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the periphery of the upper plate 20 as operation receiving means. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the staging operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball firing mechanism from firing the game ball by a pressing operation by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25 And a variable resistor for detecting a dynamic operation amount based on a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanism parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling a main game control and a function of monitoring a power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for effects.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 is configured to launch a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , A case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and payout of a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

  Next, the gaming board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area GA is formed on a front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area GA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper portion of the game area GA, and thereafter flows down the game area GA. In the game area GA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is provided. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area GA.

  A plurality of openings penetrating in the front-back direction are formed in the game board 30. In each opening, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a general-purpose unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As shown in the drawing, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are both open upward, and are arranged in a vertical direction such that the first starting port 33 is higher than the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a including a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not won various winning ports are discharged from the game area GA through the out port 43.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through-hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (power-operated accessory opening lottery) using the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electrification opening is won, the electric auditors product 34a shifts to the electrification opening state which is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball which has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area GA after the winning and the second ball. It is possible to win the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats the open state in which the game ball can win and the closed state. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to a case where a jackpot is won as a result of a jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a prize to the first opening 33 or the second opening 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is opened. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. In other words, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the first starting port 33, when the jackpot is won, the operation shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the winning in the jackpot 36a of the variable winning device 36 becomes possible. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the second starting port 34, even if a jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can win the big winning port 36a. In this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

  The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a prize at the first starting opening 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a displays a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display performs a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. When a jackpot lottery triggered by winning at the second starting port 34 is performed, the second result display unit 37b displays a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display unit performs a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d formed of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display section 37c displays the number of held first startup ports 33 by the color or combination of LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of held second startup ports 34 by the color or combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

  The general-purpose unit 38 includes a light-emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the winning combination at the through gate 35 is triggered, the general-purpose unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display in a light-on display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display, when the motor-powered character opening lottery is performed. When the motor-operated accessory opening lottery ends, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. Note that the special figure unit 37 and the general figure unit 38 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix display For example, it may be constituted by various display devices capable of displaying the lottery result and the lottery result.

  The round display section 39 is configured by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. The round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the variable prize device 36 until one of the conditions is satisfied. This is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game start is started.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area GA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured by a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT.

  When the first result display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning in the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. In addition, when the second result display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning in the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode which shifts when a jackpot is won. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, symbols 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design which added the design of the character etc. to each design which shows number 1-8 as a design displayed by change.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the display surface 41a: left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom to bottom. A variable display scrolling upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display is terminated and the stop display is performed, and when the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is a jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L.

  In the present specification, one game time means the first start port 33 or the second start port in either the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b and the symbol display device 41. 34, a period from when the variable display is started based on any one of the winnings to when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed and the next variable display is started. The time required for one game round is also called a display duration. The display continuation time is a variable display time that is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the change of the next game round starts after the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. And the stop display time, which is the time required to complete the operation. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, and the number of symbol columns, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the symbol of each symbol column. Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of symbols, such as the number.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of suspended game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that a part of the function of the MPU 62 may be provided in another element. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 62, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The MPU 62 receives a 24 V DC stable power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into necessary operating power by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, and the like, and supplies the necessary power to each device. Supply power. The MPU 62 has a plurality of detection sensors 67a to 67e provided at various winning ports such as a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. It is connected to the detection sensor, and determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area GA during a game has won each winning opening. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on winning in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on a winning in the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening and closing the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34, and a main display. The unit 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the open / close door 36b is opened / closed. Further, as a result of the election for opening the electrical accessory, when the election to open the electrical accessory is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electrical accessory driving unit 34b so that the electrical accessory 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45. Is executed.

  A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on a winning determination result. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a winning in the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the winning in the first starting opening 33 is specified. In this case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a prize to the second starting port 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out a prize ball. A firing control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When transmitting various commands, main controller 60 refers to command information storage area 63f of ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and control of driving of the speaker 46. Is performed, and the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the sound emission control device 90 is connected to the effect operation button 24, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. At the same time, it grasps the presence or absence of the reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the notice effect performed in each game.
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery, and a jackpot type counter C2 is used for determining a jackpot type such as a probability change jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and a symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach lottery to determine whether or not a reach is generated when a row is shifted and fluctuated, and a random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. When determining the display continuation time in the first result display part 37a and the second result display part 37b of the main display part 45 and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used in an electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The hold information storage area 64b includes a first result display section hold area Ra, a second result display section hold area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total hold number storage area. When the game balls sequentially enter the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the winning are chronologically stored in the hold information storage area 64b. Is stored in

  The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to increment by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball has won the first starting port 33, and the second starting port At the timing when the game ball wins at 34, the game ball is stored in the second result display section holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a hit / fail table in a hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as a lottery mode of a jackpot lottery. FIG. 7A shows a hit / fail table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a hit / fail table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the gaming state in which the winning / losing table for the low-probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, there are two random number values that can win the jackpot. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the gaming state in which the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, the number of the random numbers for the jackpot winning is 21 pieces. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. The number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than in the low probability mode.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball has won the first starting port 33, and the game ball has won the second starting port 34. At the timing, the information is stored in the second result display section holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following three modes or modes, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (3) of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable prize device 36 in the (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of prizes to the variable prize device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 36b is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b is 10 times. It can be set to continue until the number is reached. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 36b is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds elapse or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until there are six.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area GA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency prize mode, one open time of the open / close door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one opening / closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low frequency prize mode, the prize of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that a winning of the game ball can occur.

  The number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the winning in the variable prize device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which no winning occurs in the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the (2) jackpot lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, a probability change lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a hit / fail table for a high probability as a hit / fail table, A normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using the low probability winning / failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / decreasing table, the jackpot is determined as compared with the case where the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / decreasing table. High probability of doing.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area GA. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are configured such that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electrification opening in the electric auditors character lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 is the same, but in the high-frequency support mode, The number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrification is released may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time may be set longer. Further, in the case where the electric utility opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one open time. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time set after performing one electric-powered-object opening lottery and then performing the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the winning in the second starting port 34 will occur is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning to the first starting port 33 than in the second starting port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second starting port 33 is more likely to win than the first starting port 33. The probability that the winning in the mouth 34 will occur increases. When a prize is generated in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held. Can be.

  Note that the configuration in which the high frequency support mode is set to the state in which the electric utility is opened per unit time more frequently than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the role. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing times are secured after one electric-power-use-opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed, a low-frequency support mode is used in the high-frequency support mode. A setting may be made such that a shorter securing time is easier to select or an average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. Further, increasing the number of times of opening and lengthening the opening time, shortening the securing time secured after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (ie, , Shortening one display duration in the general-purpose unit 38), shortening the average time of the securing time, and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

  As described above, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a plurality of jackpot types are sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first result display unit, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second result display unit.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first result display unit in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33, 8R ordinary jackpot, 16R ordinary jackpot, 8R ordinary jackpot, Probable change jackpot, 16R certain change big hit is set. For the 8R normal jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot, the opening and closing control mode of the variable prize device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is a low probability mode, and the opening and closing execution mode. Is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode in the 8R normal jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically 100 times) after shifting to the high frequency support mode.

  The 8R probability changing jackpot and the 16R probability changing jackpot are the high frequency winning mode in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable prize device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode, the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, Is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode in the 8R probability changing jackpot and the 16R probability changing jackpot will continue until the next jackpot winning.

  In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 5” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot, and “6 to 8” corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot. It corresponds to a jackpot, "9 to 23" corresponds to an 8R probability variable jackpot, and "24 to 29" corresponds to a 16R probability variable jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When the four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is 16R probable jackpot the highest, 8R probable jackpot the next highest, then 16R normal jackpot, and finally 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player in this manner, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second result display unit in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second starting port 34, an 8R regular jackpot and a 16R regular jackpot are used. A jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, and a 16R probability variable jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 2” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot, and “3 to 8” corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot. It corresponds to a jackpot, "9 to 14" corresponds to an 8R probability variable jackpot, and "15 to 29" corresponds to a 16R probability variable jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the distribution mode of the jackpot type is the case where the jackpot is won based on the prize to the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning in the starting port 34.

  On the other hand, in any of the distribution table for the first result display section and the distribution table for the second result display section, the probability of being distributed to the probable big hit in the event of a jackpot win is the same. That is, in both the distribution table for the first result display section and the distribution table for the second result display section, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 16R probability change jackpot and the value assigned to the 8R probability change jackpot are assigned. In this case, the total number of the large hit type counters C2 and the total number of the big hit type counters C2 is 21. However, the probability of occurrence of the 16R probability change jackpot, which is the most advantageous degree for the player among the probability change jackpots, is higher in the case where the jackpot is won based on the prize in the second start port 34, and in the case of the first start port 33. It will be higher than if the jackpot was won based on the prize.

  As described above, in the distribution mode of the jackpot type between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting a winning to occur in the second starting port 34 out of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. If the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is off, the mode does not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, and no change occurs in the winning / rejecting lottery mode and the support mode.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot classification. The MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the symbol displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. To determine. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 33 or the second starting port. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball has won the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. At the timing of winning, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second result display section holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display part holding area Ra or the second result display part holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is moved to the execution area AE. Is compared with the reach determination table stored in the storage device, and whether to generate reach is determined. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot is won and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of the reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that, for some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some of the symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot may be stopped. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in that state, and the symbols are changed and displayed in the remaining symbol columns. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment refers to a combination of identical symbols in a predetermined activated line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, while performing the fluctuation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, The combination of the design in which the reach line is formed is reduced or not displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. In addition, when a reach effect is performed or before a reach display, a determination as to whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using a reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be added one by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The change type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the display duration on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b and the display duration on the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. When determining the display duration in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, the display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, one is added in order within a range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be open, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be closed.

  In addition, a combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display part holding area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first starting port 33, 2 A set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold area Rb for the result display unit corresponds to the hold information relating to the second starting port 34, and the hold information Corresponds to the special information in the present invention.

A3. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 to advance the game of each game round will be described. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a period of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S101, a reading process of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is performed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. After that, it advances to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of those counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, a winning process for the starting port is executed in accordance with the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port. The details of the winning process for the starting port in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, a prize-for-through process associated with a prize to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the winning processing for through in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning prize processing>
Next, the winning process for the starting port will be described. The winning opening prize processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9: S104).

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting port. In step S201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, in which the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has won the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, a start pending number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as a first start pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reserved area Ra, is read out, and the first start pending number RaN is read. RaN is set as a target of processing described later. The first start reserved number RaN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first starting port 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and whether the game ball has won the second starting port 34 (start winning). The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

  If it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second starting port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the winning processing for the main starting port ends.

  In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has won the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S208, a start pending number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as a second start pending number RbN), which is a value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display unit pending area Rb, is read out, and the second start pending number is read. RbN is set as a target of processing described later. The second start reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of suspension of starting set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If it is determined in step S209 that the number N of start-reserved items is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for the starting port is terminated. On the other hand, in step S209, if the number N of start reservations is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and after adding 1 to the number N of start reservations in the corresponding result display section reservation area, Proceeding to step S211, 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding result display section holding area, In S210, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the suspended number obtained by adding 1. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set to One is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the result display section reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspended number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are displayed in the second result display. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the copy reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In step S213, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the information (hold information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold command. Thereafter, the winning process for the starting port is terminated. The hold command indicates that a prize has occurred in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and that the hold information acquired based on the prize is a sound emission control device 90 as a sub-side control device and a display control device. 100, and whether the hold information relating to the current prize corresponds to a jackpot, if it corresponds to a jackpot, what type of jackpot corresponds, or whether it corresponds to the occurrence of reach This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm whether or not the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. This hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of the normal process described later, and the sound emission control device 90 that has received the hold command performs the confirmation process (FIG. 27: By step S1602, FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not the hold information related to the current prize corresponds to a jackpot, and if the hold information corresponds to a jackpot, to which type of jackpot corresponds, It is confirmed whether or not the suspension information is subject to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60.

  Further, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of held symbols in the first held display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. Is transmitted to the display control device 100 to change the display control device 100 in accordance with the command. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first holding display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning in the second starting port 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of the held items displayed in the second held display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. Is transmitted to the display control device 100 to change the display control device 100 in accordance with the command. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  Note that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines the current prize based on the information (reservation information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the current prize. Confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the hold information pertaining to the jackpot corresponds to a jackpot, and if it corresponds to a jackpot, to which type of jackpot corresponds, whether or not to correspond to the occurrence of reach, etc. ( The same processing as in step S1602 in FIG. 27 and the confirmation processing in FIG. 29) may be executed, and the result of the confirmation may be set as a hold command. In this case, the confirmation process (FIG. 27: step S1602, FIG. 29) by the sound emission control device 90 can be omitted.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning processing for through will be described. The winning processing for the through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9: S105).

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the winning processing for through. In step S301, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S301, when it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S301: YES), the process proceeds to step S302, and whether or not the number SN of retained bonuses is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined. In addition, the bonus item holding number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 which is reserved for performing the electrical accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of held items SN is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S301: NO), the prize-winning process for this through is ended.

  In step S302, when it is determined that the number of retained items SN is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and 1 is added to the number of retained items SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S304. On the other hand, in Step S302, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit (S302: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, the winning processing for the through game ends.

  In step S304, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the power saving area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the winning processing for the through game ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is executed.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the normal processing. In step S401, a startup process is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and if the prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a variation command and a type command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S402, the process proceeds to step S403.

  In step S403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game number control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of symbol change display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step S405, the process proceeds to step S406.

  In step S406, a game state shift process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S407.

  In step S <b> 407, a power support process for controlling the driving of the power accessory 34 a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the process of supporting the electric combination, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is to be opened. The details of the electronic role support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S408, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly, the start of the external output process in step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step S408 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S408: NO), in steps S409 and S410, until the next normal processing execution timing is reached. , The update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly executed. Specifically, in step S409, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S410, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S408: YES), the process returns to step S402, and the processes from step S402 to step S407 are performed. Execute.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S402 to step S407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game control process>
Next, the game times control processing will be described. The game control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 12: S405).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game times control processing. In step S501, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag is stored in the open / close execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the later-described game state shift processing, and is also cleared when the open / close execution mode is ended in the game state shift processing.

  If it is determined in step S501 that it is in the open / close execution mode (S501: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step S502. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not a winning has occurred in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that it is not in the open / close execution mode (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The variable display flag is stored when one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b starts the variable display, and is deleted when the variable display ends.

  In step S502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (S502: NO), the process proceeds to the game start process of steps S503 to S505. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the total reserved number CRN is “0” means that the starting suspended number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S503 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (S503: YES), the game replay control processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S503 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (S503: NO), the process proceeds to step S504.

  In step S504, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first result display unit reserved area Ra or the second result display unit reserved area Rb to the state after the start of the change is executed. move on. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S505, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Thereafter, the game round control process ends. The details of the change start process will be described later.

  In step S502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is performing the variable display (S502: YES), the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509 is executed.

  In step S506, it is determined whether the fluctuation display time of the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variable display time is a time from when the symbol row starts to change until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the display continuation time. Specifically, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in a display continuation time setting process (S714 in FIG. 15) described later. The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started.

  If it is determined in step S506 that the variable display time has not elapsed (S506: NO), the process proceeds to step S507, and a variable display process is executed. The change display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit relating to the current game round. After executing step S507, the game number control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S506 that the fluctuation display time has elapsed (S506: YES), the process proceeds to step S508, and a fluctuation end process is performed. The change end process displays the result display unit such that the pattern of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the change start process (S505) described later is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game round. Control. After executing step S508, the process proceeds to step S509.

  In step S509, a change end command is set. The fluctuation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect in the game round based on the received change end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the change end command to determine and display the final stop symbol in the game time (final stop). Display). After executing step S509, the game number control process ends.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to use the change end command. In this case, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 measure the elapsed time from the start of the game time by a timer counter or the like, and based on the elapse of a predetermined time, The effect may be ended, or the final stop symbol in the game round may be determined and displayed (final stop display).

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game control process (S504 in FIG. 13).

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the second startup suspended number RbN which is suspended and stored in the second result display unit reserved area Rb is “0”. If it is determined in step S601 that the second start suspension count RbN is “0” (S601: YES), the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S607 is performed. If it is determined that the second start pending number RbN is not “0” (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613 is executed.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the total reserved number CRN is 1 or more as described with reference to FIG. 13 (see S503 in FIG. 13). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start suspended number RbN is “0”. If not, that is, the suspension information for variable display is stored in the second result display unit 37b. In this case, the data stored in the second result display unit reserved area Rb is set as the target of this data setting process, regardless of whether the first start suspended number RaN is 1 or more. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display section holding area Ra and the second result display section holding area Rb, the second result display section corresponding to the second start port 34 is stored. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb has priority.

  In step S602, after subtracting 1 from the first start suspended number RaN in the first result display section reserved area Ra, the process proceeds to step S603, and subtracting 1 from the total suspended number CRN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display part holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S605.

  In step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display part holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. After executing step S605, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, if the second result display section flag is stored in the various flag storage area 64e, the flag is deleted, and if not, the state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the current variable display is the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S607.

  In step S607, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to be shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the first starting port 33. Is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of held items to the display control device 100 based on the received shift command. I do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  In step S601, when it is determined that the second start suspension count RbN is not “0” (S601: NO), the data setting processing for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613 is executed as described above. I do.

  In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the second start suspended number RbN of the second result display section reserved area Rb. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S609. In step S609, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by one, and the flow advances to step S610 to move the data stored in the first area of the second result display part reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S611.

  In step S611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display part holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. After executing step S611, the process proceeds to step S612.

  In step S612, if the second result display section flag is not stored in the second result display section flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e, the flag is stored. Maintain state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S613.

  In step S613, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to be shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the second starting port 34. Is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (S505 in FIG. 13).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the change start process. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the MPU 62. After that, it is deleted when a normal jackpot is won.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (S701: NO), the process proceeds to step S702 to determine whether or not the winning / refusal lottery mode is low by referring to the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / not-hitting table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. Is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the current mode is the high probability mode (S701: YES), the process proceeds to step S703 to determine whether the high probability mode is valid by referring to the high / low probability mode table. Specifically, whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / non-hitting table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. Is determined. After executing Step S702 or Step S703, the process proceeds to Step S704.

  In step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the win / fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S702 or step S703 is a big hit. In step S704, if the result of the hit determination is a big hit (S704: YES), in steps S705 to S712, a process for setting a game result in the case of a big hit and a stop result are set. Execute the processing of

  In step S705, it is determined whether or not the second result display section flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S705 that the second result display section flag is not stored (S705: NO), the process proceeds to step S706, and the distribution table for the first result display section (see FIG. 8A). Is performed with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is set to any one of the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable hit, and the numerical range of the 16R probability variable hit. Is determined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the second result display unit flag is stored (S705: YES), the process proceeds to step S707, and the distribution table for the second result display unit (FIG. 8B) (See Reference) to determine the distribution. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is set to any one of the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable hit, and the numerical range of the 16R probability variable hit. Is determined. After executing the processing of step S706 or step S707. Proceed to step S708.

  In step S708, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot that has been assigned in step S706 or step S707 is a probability-change jackpot. If it is determined in step S708 that the game result is a probability change jackpot (S708: YES), the process proceeds to step S709.

  In step S709, a stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot is a process in which the stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the current game round in which the player wins the probability change jackpot. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot that has been assigned in step S706 or step S707 is referred to by referring to the stop result table for the probability change jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The acquired address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

  In step S710, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type allocated in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. More specifically, if it is an 8R probability change jackpot, an 8R probability change flag is stored, and if it is a 15R probability change jackpot, a 15R probability change flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S714.

  If it is determined in step S708 that the type of the jackpot that has been assigned in step S706 or step S707 is not a probability-variable jackpot (S708: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S711.

  In step S711, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process is a process in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot that has been assigned in step S706 or step S707 is referred to by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The acquired address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S711, the process proceeds to Step S712.

  In step S712, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type allocated in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. More specifically, if it is an 8R ordinary jackpot, an 8R ordinary flag is stored, and if it is a 15R ordinary jackpot, a 15R ordinary flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S714.

  In step S704, when the result of the jackpot lottery in step S702 or step S703 is not a jackpot winning (S704: NO), the process proceeds to step S713 to execute a stop result setting process for a miss. The stop result setting process for a disconnection is a process of terminating the variable display in a state where any of the stop results is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the disconnection result is obtained. This is a process for setting whether or not. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained by referring to the stop result table for the out-of-office in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S713, the process proceeds to step S714.

  In step S714, a setting process of the display continuation time is executed. The display continuation time setting process sets the display continuation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process to perform. Details of the display continuation time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S714, the process proceeds to Step S715.

  In step S715, it is determined whether or not the second result display section flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S715 that the second result display section flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S715: NO), the process advances to step S716 to set a first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning in the first starting port 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the display continuation time set in step S714. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S715 that the second result display section flag has been stored (S715: YES), the flow advances to step S717 to set a second variation command. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning in the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the display continuation time set in step S714. After executing Step S716 or Step S717, the process proceeds to Step S718.

  In step S718, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on the 8R probability variable jackpot, information on the 16R probability variable jackpot, information on the 8R normal jackpot, information on the 16R normal jackpot, or information on the off result.

  The variation command and the type command set in steps S716 to S718 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect is executed. After executing Step S718, the process proceeds to Step S719.

  In step S719, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b starts the symbol change display. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is identified as the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second result display section flag is stored, the variable display is started by specifying that the result display section corresponding to the current game round is the second result display section 37b. After executing step S719, the present variation start process ends.

<Display duration setting process>
Next, the setting process of the display continuation time will be described. The setting process of the display continuation time is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the change start process (FIG. 15: S714).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the display continuation time. In step S801, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 62. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64, and if any of the flags is stored, it is determined that a reach occurs (S802: YES). ), And proceed to step S803. Even when none of the above flags are stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, the reach occurs. Then, it is determined (S802: YES), and the process proceeds to step S803. In specifying the presence or absence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In step S803, display continuation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804, in which the variable display time information included in the display continuation time information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the display continuation time setting process ends.

  In step S802, when it is determined that no reach occurs in the current game round (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S805, and the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d. , The display continuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S806, in which the variable display time information included in the display continuation time information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the display continuation time setting process ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display continuation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table is set so that the display continuation time becomes shorter as the number of the total number of held pieces CRN increases. I have. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the total reserved number CRN may be adopted, and the display duration may be set to be shorter as the total reserved number CRN is smaller. . When the second number RbN of start-ups is “0”, the display duration time becomes shorter as the number RaN of first start-ups is larger, and the second number RbN of the first start-ups is “1” or more. May be set so that the display continuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start pending numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second number RbN of start-ups is “0”, the display continuation time becomes longer as the number RaN of first start-ups is greater, and the number RbN of the second start-ups is “1” or more. May be set so that the display continuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start suspended numbers RbN is larger, or is constant without depending on the suspended numbers RaN and RbN.

  In addition, in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach time is set so that a shorter display duration is selected as compared with the case where the number of hold information is the same as in the case where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. An occurrence display duration table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected display duration may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

  Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display duration when a reach occurs, and the display duration that is easy to be selected and the display duration that is difficult to be selected are different between the jackpot winning and the off-reach. It may be configured. Further, the display duration table for the probability change jackpot, the display duration table for the normal jackpot, the display duration table for the off-reach, and the display duration table for the complete departure may be individually set. As described above, the display continuation time of each game time is determined using the presence / absence of a jackpot, the presence / absence of a reach, the number of hold information, and the value of the fluctuation type counter as parameters.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 12: S406).

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a game state transition process. In step S901, it is determined whether the operation is in the open / close execution mode. If it is determined in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in effect (S901: NO), the process proceeds to step S902, where the symbol variation display on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b for one game time is performed. It is determined whether or not the timing has ended. If it is determined in step S902 that the timing does not indicate that the variable display has ended (S902; NO), the present game state transition process ends.

  If it is determined in step S902 that the timing at which the variable display has ended is reached (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903, and the game result of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery) shifts to the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 8R probable change flag, the 16R probable change flag, the 8R normal flag, and the 16R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64. When it is determined that none of the above flags is stored (S903: NO), the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S903 that any of the above flags is stored (S903: YES), the process advances to step S904 to start round display for notifying the type of the current open / close execution mode. Execute. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 of the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the output. After executing Step S904, the process proceeds to Step S905.

  In step S905, the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode is determined. More specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R certain change flag, 16R normal change flag, 8R certain change flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. If it is determined in step S905 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R certainty change flag or the 16R normal flag (S905: YES), the process proceeds to step S906, where the large hit type flag is provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S905 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R certainty variable flag or the 8R normal flag (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907 to provide the flag in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "8" is set in the obtained first round counter area RC1. After performing Step S906 or Step S907, the process proceeds to Step S908.

  In step S908, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). The opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices such that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing step S908, the game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S901 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S909 to execute a special winning opening / closing process. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is driven on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is equal to or greater than "1". The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is being opened, the variable winning driving unit is provided on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 36a or that the opening limit number has won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the special winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing Step S909, the process proceeds to Step S910.

  In step S910, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S910: NO), the present game state transition processing ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S910: YES), the process proceeds to step S911, where an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S911, the process proceeds to Step S912.

  In step S912, a shift process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode. The details of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described later. After executing Step S912, the process proceeds to Step S913.

  In step S913, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 of the main display unit 45 is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S914 to execute end processing of the open / close execution mode. More specifically, when the 16R probable change flag, the 8R probable change flag, the 16 normal flag, and the 8R normal flag are stored, these flags are deleted, and when these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. I do. After executing step S914, the game state transition processing ends.

<Grand Prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 17: S909).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening / closing process. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 36a is not being opened (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1002: YES), the main winning opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1003: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the variable winning drive unit opens the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the set winning modes are all the high-frequency winning modes, "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, "10" is set in a winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 in order to count the number of winning of the game balls to the special winning opening 36a. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency prize mode is set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the prize counter area PC. May be set. After executing Step S1005, the process proceeds to Step S1006.

  In step S1006, a release command is set. Thereafter, the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. The release command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started on the basis of the received opening command, and also displays the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 on the special winning opening 36a. Is updated to the content corresponding to the start of the release of. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and displays the contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 and the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007, where it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0”. I do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S1008 that no winning has occurred (S1008: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1008 that a winning has occurred (S1008: YES), the process proceeds to step S1009, and the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1010.

  In step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not “0” (S1010: NO), the main winning opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1007: YES), or if it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0", (S1010: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011 to execute a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to a non-driven state in order to close the special winning opening 36a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1012.

  In step S1012, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by one. After that, the process advances to step S1013 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1013: YES), the main winning opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1013: NO), “1000” (that is, 2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1014, the process advances to step S1015 to set a close command. Thereafter, the special winning opening opening / closing process ends.

The set closing command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed. Is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and determines the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 in the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the completion of release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and displays the contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 and ends the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.
The corresponding process is executed.

<Transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode>
Next, transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described. The transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition processing (FIG. 17: S912).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 stores a flag corresponding to the probability change jackpot as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probable change flag or the 8R probable change flag is stored in the RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R probable change flag or the 8R probable change flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: YES), the process advances to step S1102 to execute a flag erasure process. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying a gaming state. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and if these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. I do. After executing step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, the high-probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S1104, where the high-frequency support flag is stored. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next time a jackpot is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the winning / rejection lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode ends.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1106 to execute the flag erasing process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, after storing the high-frequency support flag, the flow advances to step S1108 to set “100” in the number-of-games counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the high frequency support mode ends after the game has been executed 100 times, and thereafter, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. . After executing step S1108, the shift processing at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode ends.

<Process for electrical support>
Next, a description will be given of the processing for supporting electric power. The electric power support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 12: S407).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the process for supporting electric power. In step S1201, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is deleted when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1201 that the support flag is not stored (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, it is determined whether the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the electric auditors character lottery for determining whether or not to bring the electric accessory 34a into the open state, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored. . If it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is not stored (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display continuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  In step S1203, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1203: NO), the present electrical role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204.

  In step S1204, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the general-purpose unit 38. If it is determined in step S1204 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1204: YES), the process advances to step S1205 to set the out-of-range display, and then ends the electric power support process. By setting the off display, the change display of the symbol in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated in a state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1204: NO), the process proceeds to step S1206.

  In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0”. In step S1206, when it is determined that the value of the number of held items SN is “0” (S1206: NO), the process for supporting the electric role is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0” (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether the operation mode is the open / close execution mode. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1208 to determine whether the operation mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S1207 (S1207: NO), and if the high frequency support mode is in step S1208 (S1208: YES), the process proceeds to step S1209 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. More specifically, the value stored in the electric-power-use holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric-power-goods opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric-power-goods opening lottery is performed. Wins. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1210.

  In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S1209 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the electric auditors product open lottery is a support win (S1210: YES), the process advances to step S1211 to store a support win flag and provide the support win flag in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set to the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1212. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support winning (S1210: NO), the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the process of step S1211.

  In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1212 that the winning / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1212: YES), the process proceeds to step S1213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1212 that the win / fail lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S1212: NO), the main control process ends.

  In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is “0”. In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game is completed. If it is determined in step S1213 that the number-of-games counter area is not “0” (S1213: NO), the main control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1213 that the number-of-games counter area is “0”, the flow advances to step S1214 to clear the high frequency support flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1215, the low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. After that, the processing for electric role support ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1215 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 12: step S402). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on the reception of the low-frequency support command, and executes a process corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S1207 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S1207: YES), or if it is determined in step S1218 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S1208: NO), the process proceeds to step S1216, where the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. More specifically, the value stored in the electric-power-use holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric-power-goods opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric-power-goods opening lottery is performed. Wins. Also, "14750" (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the electric accessory. After that, it advances to step S1217.

  In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S1216 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S1217 that the support has not been won (S1217: NO), the main processing for electric power combination is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1217 that the support has been won (S1217: YES), the flow advances to step S1218 to store the support win flag and set “1” in the second round counter area RC2. The processing for this electric role support ends.

  If it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is stored (S1202: YES), the process advances to step S1219 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display continuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. In step S1219, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1219: NO), the display of the picture in the general-purpose unit 38 is being changed, so the processing for the main electric hand support is continued. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1219: YES), the process proceeds to step S1220.

  In step S1220, a hit display is set. Thus, the variation display of the pattern in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process advances to step S1221 to store the supporting flag and erase the support winning flag. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the supporting flag is stored (S1201: YES), the process advances to step S1222 to execute an electric utility opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

<Electronic opening / closing processing>
Next, the electrical opening / closing process will be described. The electric-power opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric-power support process (FIG. 20: S1222).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the electrical opening / closing process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step S1302, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1302: NO), the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric auditors product 34a is not completed, the electric power opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1302: YES), the flow advances to step S1303 to perform a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2, which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a. After executing Step S1303, the process proceeds to Step S1304.

  In step S1304, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1305 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. In step S1305, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1305: NO), the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S1305: YES), the process proceeds to step S1306, and the supporting flag is deleted. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the electric accessory 34a is not being opened (S1301: NO), the process advances to step S1307 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step S1307, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1307: NO), the main control opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1307: YES), the flow advances to step S1308 to execute an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1309, it is determined whether the operation mode is the open / close execution mode. If it is determined that the operation mode is not the open / close execution mode (S1309: NO), the process proceeds to step S1310 to determine whether the mode is the high frequency support mode. I do.

  If it is determined in step S1310 that the current mode is the high-frequency support mode (S1310: YES), the process proceeds to step S1311, and “800” (that is, 1.6 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1309 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S1309: YES), or if it is determined in step S1310 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S1310: NO), the process proceeds to step S1312, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

A4. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, in a part of the area of the ROM 93, a hold confirmation table storage area 93a, a noticed notice notice generation table storage area 93b, a noticed notice notice effect table storage area 93c, and a stop notice table storage for noticed notice notice are stored. An area 93d, a variable display pattern table storage area 93e, and the like are provided. Details of these will be described later.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, a notice effect presentation storage area 94d for the already-viewed notice are provided. Details of these will be described later. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from main controller 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, the various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG image data for a background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called an “rendering chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to a rendering process. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like, intervenes in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 in a shared manner. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which JPEG format image data for a background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as a main MPU 62, a main ROM 63, and a main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as a light MPU 92 and a sound light, respectively. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called a display MPU 102.

A5. Preliminary notice:
A5-1. Summary of the sighted notice:
Next, an outline of the already-viewed notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a time chart showing an example of the already-viewed notice performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the already-viewed notice is executed. The already-notified notice means that a player is caused to execute at least one effect element a plurality of times with the same content, so that the player feels that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab). It is a production to give. The effect element is a unit that constitutes a game effect, for example, a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image (still image or moving image) is displayed in front of the background image, or a predetermined object image such as a mini-character as a background. Object announcement effect to be displayed in front of the image (mini-character announcement effect), background change announcement effect to change the background image to a mode different from the normal state, character announcement effect to cause a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, various types A lamp emission effect in which a lamp emits light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence change effect in which a symbol sequence is changed in a predetermined scroll pattern, and one remaining symbol in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line Reach effect that fluctuates the line, symbol pseudo stop effect that artificially stops a predetermined symbol combination, complete stop of the predetermined symbol combination And the like can be given that design complete stop demonstration.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the already-viewed notice is satisfied based on the hold information, that is, whether or not to generate the already-viewed notice. Then, when it is determined that the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 waits until the game time related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been completed. , Execute at least one effect element a plurality of times with the same content. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the determination as to whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-viewed notice is satisfied before the hold information subject to the determination is subjected to the jackpot lottery. .

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment confirms that the following conditions are satisfied when a game ball wins in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the hold information is acquired. Then, the already-viewed notice notice generation lottery process to be described later is executed. In a case where the player has won the lottery process for generating a noticeable notice, the condition for generating the noticeable notice is satisfied.
(Condition 1) That the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not included in the already stored hold information. (Condition 2) When a game ball wins in the first starting port 33, it is related to this win. The total reserved number CRN including the reserved information is 2 or more (condition 3). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 34, the second starting reserved number RbN including the reserved information related to the current winning is provided. Must be 2 or more

  The reason for the condition 1 is that even if the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times by using the game times related to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot and the game times related to the hold information that has been won this time, This is because the jackpot effect is executed after the game time related to the hold information to be performed, so that the continuity of the effect elements of the same content executed a plurality of times is interrupted, and it is difficult to give the player a sense of being viewed. The reason for the condition 2 and the condition 3 is that if the number of holdings including the holding information related to the current prize is 2 or more, the already-viewed notice can be executed over a plurality of game times. In the condition 3, the second starting hold number RbN is used as a reference because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information acquired by winning the second starting opening 34 is the first starting opening 33 This is because the jackpot lottery is prioritized over the hold information acquired by winning the prize. However, these conditions are merely examples, and other conditions may be imposed or no conditions are required. For example, in the case where the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in one game time, these conditions may not be necessary.

  In the already-viewed notice generation lottery process of the present embodiment, the previously-viewed notice is issued only when the hold information related to the current prize is the hold information that will be a jackpot winning or reach occurrence when the jackpot lottery is later targeted. You can win the outbreak. The reason for this is that in the game times related to the hold information that causes the jackpot or the reach, a relatively long display duration is set, so that a suggestion effect, a battle effect, and the like, which will be described later, are easily executed. Then, in a case where the player has won the already-visited notice generation lottery process, the conditions for generating the already-visited notice have been satisfied, and the pachinko machine 10 has determined that the conditions for generating the already-visited notice have been satisfied. Until the game round related to the information ends, at least one effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content.

  In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23 (A), at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, a game ball wins in the first starting port 33, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, and based on the reservation information related to the winning. As a result of the above-described determination, the condition for occurrence of the already-viewed notice is satisfied. Then, the game time P03 indicated as the third game time is the game time related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-viewed notice.

  In the example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the pachinko machine 10 selects the cut-in notice effect A having the same content as the effect element A to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and performs the cut-in with the same content. The announcement effect A is executed once in each of the three game times P01, P02, and P03. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes the cut-in notice effect A in all of the consecutive game times until the game time relating to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been satisfied. I have.

  In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol complete stop effect in which the symbol A (for example, a combination of symbols “1, 2, 3”) is completely stopped in the first game round P01. At the same time as the second game P02, a symbol complete stop effect of completely stopping the same off symbol A is executed. That is, the pachinko machine 10 selects a design complete stop effect of the same content of completely stopping the same out-of-design A as a performance element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and completely stops the design of the same content. The production has been performed multiple times.

  In the example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes a symbol pseudo stop effect in which the cut-in notice effect A is executed in the third game time P3, and then the off symbol A is stopped in a pseudo manner. I have. The symbol pseudo stop effect is strictly different from the symbol complete stop effect in that the symbol is not completely stopped. However, the manner of effects that the player can recognize is very similar between the case where the combination of symbols is pseudo stopped and the case where the combination is completely stopped. Therefore, in the present specification, a symbol pseudo stop effect is regarded as an effect element having the same content as a symbol complete stop effect in which a symbol is completely stopped if the contents of the combination of the symbols to be pseudo stopped are the same. Hereinafter, the symbol complete stop effect and the symbol pseudo stop effect are collectively referred to as a symbol stop effect.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. . In the example shown in FIG. 24, the suggested effect is to display on the symbol display device 41 an image in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player, and to output sound or light accompanying the image. This is a mode in which the signal is output to a speaker 46 and various lamps 47. However, the suggestion effect may be any other mode as long as it can indicate to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. For example, "maybe a dejab?" , "Is it a dejab?", "A dejab?", "A dejab is a sign of a jackpot?", "This production is familiar!", "That? An image containing a message such as "This is a feeling of being seen !?", "I'm tired if you just play the same effect ..." and the like, and a sound containing these messages is output from the speaker 46. It may be a directing effect or the like.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, then executes a battle effect in which the player character and the enemy character confront each other, and thereafter, the result corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery. Direction (a victory effect if the jackpot is won, a defeat effect if the result is out). In the example shown in FIG. 24, the battle effect displays an image in which the female character on the player side and the male character on the enemy side confront each other on the symbol display device 41, and outputs the sound and light accompanying the image to the speaker 46. And various lamps 47 for output. However, the battle effect may be in another mode or may be omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the victory effect displays an image on which the female character of the player is pleased with the victory on the symbol display device 41, and outputs the sound and light accompanying the image to the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47. This is an aspect in which the information is output to the user. However, the victory effect as a result effect may be another mode or may be omitted. Thereafter, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot is executed.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player feels that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given. The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning for the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, if the player experiences a jackpot after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is executed in expectation of the effect element of the same content being executed a plurality of times. Every time it is done, he will always pay attention to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to set the player's attention to the effect element to be sequentially executed. It is possible to suitably increase the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since different degrees of reliability (expected degrees) can be set for each type of effect element to be executed in a single shot, for example, effect elements with high reliability have the same contents. When executed multiple times, the player strongly expects that the possibility of winning a jackpot is very high, while the player is not performing a low-reliability effect element. In addition, the player expects the effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, so that the player's attention to the effect element can be appropriately increased.

  In addition, even if an effect that directly suggests that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot, for example, an effect of lighting a pre-reading holding lamp or the like in a color different from the normal time is not performed, the same content is provided. Can be added, in which attention is paid to whether or not the effect element is executed a plurality of times.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to execute the same effect. The player can be convinced that the execution of the effect element a plurality of times has a special meaning. Then, when the production element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is merely a coincidence that the production element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, or It is confirmed whether or not the announcement is a preliminary effect, based on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and the user is expected to execute the suggestion effect. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute an operation acceptance effect element (button effect) including a content indicating that the operation of the effect operation button 24 is accepted by the player as an effect element. When the condition for generating the already-viewed notice is satisfied, the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The reason will be described. When the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of presses, and the like). In some cases. For this reason, even if the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice is satisfied and the pachinko machine 10 executes the same type of button effect a plurality of times, depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, The effect may be performed with different contents, and it may not be possible to give the player a sense of being viewed. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, different contents are executed depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player. Can be suppressed, and the player can be surely given a sense of sight. However, the pachinko machine 10 cancels the execution of the already-viewed notice when the button effect is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, even if the condition for generating the already-viewed notice is satisfied. It may be configured.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the already-viewed notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and If it is determined that the conditions for the occurrence of the visual notice are satisfied, the hold information that is determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the visual notice is executed multiple times before the jackpot lottery is performed. Start execution of the rendering element that is. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the display continuation time, which is the time required for each game round, immediately before starting each game round. For this reason, when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied and the type of the effect element (for example, cut-in notice effect) that is executed a plurality of times in the already-notified notice is randomly selected, within the display duration time of each game time, There is a case where an effect element of a length that cannot be executed is selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for occurrence of the already-viewed notice is satisfied, an effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration among display durations that can be selected in each game. The element is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, and the selected effect element is executed in each game time. In this way, even if the display duration determined for each game time is different, it is possible to reliably execute the effect element having the same content in each game time.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the length of the display duration of the game time in which the selected rendering element is to be executed is a length that allows the selected rendering element to be executed multiple times, In the one game time, the selected effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times.

  In Example 2 shown in FIG. 23B, the display duration time T2 of the second game time P02 is twice or more as long as the time required for the effect element A (for example, the cut-in notice effect A). , The pachinko machine 10 executes the same effect element A twice in the game time P02. Note that, after the end of the first effect element A in the second game turn P02, the pachinko machine 10 has the same release design A (for example, “1, 2”) as the stop design A stopped in the first game play P01. , 3), is executed once. For this reason, it is possible to further enhance the sense of sight given to the player.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content to be executed a plurality of times (hereinafter, also referred to as an effect element for the already-visited notice) more times. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize the already-viewed feeling. In addition, the number of times the effect element for the already-viewed notice is executed increases or decreases depending on the length of the display duration of one game time, so that the player's expectation can be inflected.

  Furthermore, the rendering element for the already-viewed notice is a rendering element that can be executed within the shortest display duration among display durations that can be determined for each game, so the time required for one execution is , Less than the length of the display duration of one game. Therefore, even if the already-presented notice effect element is executed once in one game time, a surplus time may be generated in the display continuation time. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the length of the display continuation time of one game time is a length that allows the effect element for visual feeling notice (the effect element of the same content) to be executed a plurality of times. Since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in the one game, the surplus time of the display continuation time can be minimized.

  In the above-described example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the effect element A in each of all successive game times until the game time related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for occurrence of the already-viewed notice has been satisfied. Although the execution is performed, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. For example, the effect element A may be executed only in the game time P01 and the game time P03.

  In the following, in particular, when a specific announcement effect is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content in the already-announced announcement, the selected announcement effect is also referred to as a “announcement effect for the already-announced announcement”. Also, when a design stop effect that completely stops or simulates a specific combination of symbols is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content in the already-viewed notice, in the selected symbol stop effect, A combination of specific symbols to be stopped or simulated to be stopped is also referred to as a “stop symbol for a noticed feeling notice”.

A5-2. Control related to the already-notified notice:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described notice of already-viewed feeling in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound-side MPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S1401, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound-light RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. Commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , And are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. The details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control processing, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding processing in step S1402. After executing Step S1403, the process proceeds to Step S1404.

  In step S1404, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read in the command corresponding process of step S1402. After executing step S1404, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Command processing>
Next, a command corresponding process will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25: S1402).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command corresponding process, a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described.

  In step S1501, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1501 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: YES), the flow advances to step S1502 to execute a hold command handling process. In the hold command corresponding process, the above-described process related to the already-viewed notice is executed based on the information set in the hold command. Details of the pending command processing will be described later. After executing Step S1502, the process proceeds to Step S1503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503 without executing step S1502.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether a change command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504, and the effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect, a stop symbol, a variable display pattern, and the like to be executed in the current game round are set. The details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1503: NO), the process proceeds to step S1505 without executing step S1504.

  In step S1505, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1505 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: YES), the flow advances to step S1506 to execute an opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set, and the information corresponding to the content of the effect is set. An opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1505 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: NO), the process proceeds to step S1507 without executing step S1506.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S1507 that the ending command has been received (S1507: YES), the process advances to step S1508 to execute an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and The ending effect command in which the corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1507: NO), the process proceeds to step S1509 without executing step S1508.

  In step S1509, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processing, for example, the setting of the effect content corresponding to the opening command and the setting of the effect content corresponding to the closing command are performed. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, an effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102.

<Pending command support processing>
Next, the hold command handling process will be described. The suspended command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 26: S1502).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command corresponding process is a process executed when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the pending command corresponding processing will be described.

  In step S1601, a winning update process is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pieces of hold information obtained based on winning in the first opening 33, the number of holding information obtained based on winning in the second opening 34, A process for enabling the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of information is executed. Details of the update processing at the time of winning in step S1601 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning in the first opening 33 is also referred to as “first reserved number”, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the winning in the second opening 34 is The total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as a “second reserved number” and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number. After executing step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, a confirmation process is performed. In the confirmation process, a process is performed to enable the sound-light-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the hold command to be read this time corresponds to a jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the like. Details of the confirmation processing in step S1602 will be described later. After executing Step S1602, the process proceeds to Step S1603.

  In step S1603, the already-viewed notice notice processing is executed. In the already-visited notice process, a process for determining whether or not the above-mentioned already-visited notice occurrence condition is satisfied is executed. A setting process for executing a notice is executed. Details of the already-viewed notice notice processing in step S1603 will be described later. After executing step S1603, the process for responding to the pending command ends.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 27: S1601).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the updating process at the time of winning. In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first opening 33. If it is determined in step S1701 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33 (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702, and the sound and light are output. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on winning in the first starting port 33 in the sound-light-side MPU 92. In the update processing of the first pending number counter area, the information of the first pending number counter area is updated to the information of the pending number included in the pending command to be read this time. After executing Step S1702, the process proceeds to Step S1704.

  In step S1701, when it is determined that the hold command to be read out this time is not transmitted based on winning in the first opening 33 (S1701: NO), that is, the hold command is the second opening If it is determined that the data has been transmitted based on the winning of the No. 34, the process proceeds to step S1703, and the updating process of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-side RAM 94 is executed. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning in the second starting port 34 in the sound-light-side MPU 92. In the updating process of the second reserved number counter area, the information of the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command that has been read this time. After executing Step S1703, the process proceeds to Step S1704.

  The reason why the processes in steps S1702 and S1703 are described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio light emission control device 90. Not done. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 displays the hold information. While being stored and held, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of hold information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is employed in which the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area is counted up each time the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually stores the hold command. There may be a problem that the number of held pieces of information and the number of held pieces of information recognized by the sound emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command every time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of held items included is set in the first held number counter area or the second held number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience.

  In step S1704, a process of updating the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved number counter area stores the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning in the first opening 33 and the number of the pending information acquired based on the winning in the second opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved number counter area is represented by the sum of the information of the reserved number measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information of the reserved number measured in the second reserved number counter area. Update to After executing Step S1704, the update processing at the time of the final winning is ended.

<Confirmation process>
Next, the confirmation processing will be described. The confirmation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 27: S1602). As described above, when information such as the presence or absence of a big hit, the type of a big hit, and the occurrence of a reach has already been set in the hold command, this confirmation processing can be omitted.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the confirmation processing. As described above, the confirmation process is a process executed when it is determined that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the confirmation processing will be described. Note that the contents of each table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93 described in the following steps are the hit / fail table storage area 63a, the distribution table storage area 63b, and the main ROM 63. The contents are the same as the contents of each table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c.

  In step S1801, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the pending command to be read this time is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S1802 to determine whether or not the current winning / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, when the high-probability mode flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94, it is determined that the mode is the low-probability mode, and when the high-probability mode flag is stored, , It is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode, that is, the mode is the high probability mode. The high probability mode flag is stored when a high probability mode command is received from the main MPU 62.

  If it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is the low-probability mode (S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803, where the low-probability-mode hit / fail table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light ROM 93 is read. refer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode success / failure table, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is not the low-probability mode (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the high-probability mode success / failure table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound-side ROM 93 is stored. See Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode success / failure table, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1805 that the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1805: YES), the process proceeds to step S1806, where the hold command that has been read this time is The information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 included is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S1807 to refer to the distribution table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93. More specifically, if the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first start-up opening 33, the second start-up opening distribution table is referred to and the second start-up opening distribution table is referred to. If the transmission is based on the winning in the starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to.

  In step S1808, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability change jackpot. If it is determined in step S1808 that it corresponds to a probability-variable jackpot (S1808: YES), the process proceeds to step S1809 to temporarily store the probability-variable jackpot information in the register of the sound-light-side MPU 92. Thereafter, the confirmation processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1808 that the jackpot does not correspond to the probability change jackpot (S1808: NO), the process proceeds to step S1810, and the normal jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound-light-side MPU 92. Thereafter, the confirmation processing ends.

  In step S1805, if it is determined that the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1805: NO), the process proceeds to step S1811, and the hold command to be read out this time is The information of the value of the reach random number counter C3 included is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S1812 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light ROM 93. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1813, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the information of the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

  If it is determined in step S1813 that the system corresponds to the occurrence of reach (S1813: YES), the process proceeds to step S1814, and the reach occurrence information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 92 on the sound light side. Thereafter, the confirmation processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1813 that the current state does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach (S1813: NO), the present confirmation processing ends.

<Process for notice of already seen>
Next, the already-viewed notice process will be described. The already-viewed notice process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 27: S1603).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the already-viewed notice notice processing. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33. In step S1901, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on winning in the first opening 33 (S1901: NO), that is, winning in the second opening 34 If it is determined that the data has been transmitted based on, the process proceeds to step S1902.

  In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the first sighted notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94. The first sighted notice flag is stored when the above-mentioned sighted notice is started with the hold information based on the winning in the first starting opening 33 as an opportunity, and is deleted when the sighted notice is ended. Is a flag to be executed.

  If it is determined in step S1902 that the first sighted notice flag is stored (S1902: YES), the process proceeds to step S1903, where the first sighted notice flag is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S1904. "0" is set in the counter for notice of notice notice in the RAM 94 of the sound light side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1905.

  When the already-visited notice is set to execute the already-visited notice, the sound-light-side MPU 92 specifies how many times the game is to be executed after that. It is a measuring means for performing. As will be described later, information on the held number is set in the already-viewed notice counter area, and is updated so as to be decremented by one each time a new game is started. Then, when the information stored in the already-viewed notice counter area after the update is “0” which is the initial value, the already-viewed notice flag stored at that time is deleted.

  Here, when the hold command is transmitted based on the winning in the second starting port 34, in other words, when there is a winning in the second starting port 34, the first sighted notice flag is set. Will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information relating to the winning in the second starting port 34 is subjected to the jackpot lottery with priority over the holding information relating to the winning in the first starting port 33, If a winning is made in the starting opening 34, the order of the jackpot lottery of the hold information is changed, and the assumption of the already-viewed notice that has already been set when the winning in the first starting opening 33 is broken. Would. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a winning is made in the second starting port 34, the first sighted notice flag is erased, so that the sighted notice that the assumption has been broken is lost. The execution has been canceled.

  If it is determined in step S1902 that the first sighted notice flag is not stored (S1902: NO), the process advances to step S1905 without executing steps S1903 and S1904.

  If it is determined in step S1901 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33 (S1901: YES), steps S1902, S1903 and step S1901 are performed. The process proceeds to step S1905 without executing S1904, that is, without executing the erasure of the first sighted notice flag.

  In the processing from step S1905 to step S1911 described next, processing relating to the jackpot hold flag is executed. Therefore, prior to the description of the processing from step S1905 to step S1911, the jackpot holding flag, the first erasing counter area and the second erasing counter area used for determining whether to delete the jackpot holding flag will be described. I do.

  The jackpot hold flag includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 60. If it is, it is information for specifying it by the sound light side MPU 92. In the jackpot hold flag erasing process, in a situation where the jackpot hold flag is stored, both the information stored in the first erasing counter area and the second erasing counter area, which will be described later, are “0”, which are initial values. It is executed when

  The first erasure counter area is used when a first result display section holding area Ra stores the jackpot information corresponding to the jackpot, and the held information is used as a start of the game round and the first result display section This is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the holding area Ra by the sound light side MPU 92. As will be described later, the information of the hold number set in the first erasing counter area is stored in the hold information stored in the first result display section hold area Ra (that is, the winning information to the first starting port 33). The information is updated to be decremented by one each time a new game starts.

  When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the second result display section holding area Rb, the second deletion counter area is used as the start of the game round and the second result display section is used for the second result display section. It is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the holding area Rb by the sound light side MPU 92. As will be described later, the information on the number of holds set in the second counter area for erasing is stored in the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit (that is, the winning information to the second starting port 34). The information is updated to be decremented by one every time a new game starts. Hereinafter, the description returns to the processing related to the jackpot hold flag.

  In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a hold command corresponding to a jackpot. If it is determined in step S1905 that the hold command to be read this time is a hold command corresponding to a jackpot (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906, where the hold command to be read this time is the first to be read. It is determined whether or not the transmission is based on the winning in the first starting port 33.

  If it is determined in step S1906 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first opening 33 (S1906: YES), the process proceeds to step S1907, and the process proceeds to step S1907. The information of the first suspended number included in the suspended command to be read is specified, and the information of the specified first suspended number is set in the first erasing counter area. After executing Step S1907, the process proceeds to Step S1909.

  In step S1906, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning in the first startup port 33 (S1906: NO), that is, the hold command is the second startup port. If it is determined that the command has been transmitted based on the winning in No. 34, the process advances to step S1908 to specify the information of the second suspended number included in the command to be read this time, and The information of the number of 2 suspensions is set in the second erasing counter area. After executing Step S1908, the process proceeds to Step S1909.

  In step S1909, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound-light-side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot hold flag is stored (S1909: YES), the hold command handling process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot hold flag is not stored (S1909: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910, where the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound-light side RAM94. After executing Step S1910, the process proceeds to Step S1912.

  If it is determined in step S1905 that the hold command to be read this time is not the hold command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1911, where the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound-light-side RAM 94. Is determined.

  If it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot hold flag is not stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 (S1911: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 (S1911: YES), the hold command handling process ends.

  As described in the processing from step S1905 to step S1911, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the jackpot hold flag has already been stored (S1909: YES, S1911: YES), the sense of the already-viewed state is felt. Various settings for executing the notice are not performed. Accordingly, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is already stored in the first result display part holding area Ra or the second result display part holding area Rb of the main control device 60, the first starting port 33 or the Even if new hold information is acquired based on the winning in the second starting port 34, various settings for executing the already-viewed notice are not performed.

  In step S1912, it is determined whether the first sighted notice flag is stored in the sound-light-side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S1912 that the first already-viewed notice flag has been stored (S1912: YES), the suspension command handling process ends. That is, when the first already-viewed notice flag is stored, the already-viewed notice generation lottery process in step S19 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the first already-viewed notice flag is not stored (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1913.

  In step S <b> 1913, it is determined whether the sound-light-side RAM 94 stores the second already-viewed notice flag. In step S1913, when it is determined that the second already-viewed notice flag is stored (S1913: YES), the suspension command handling process ends. That is, when the second already-viewed notice flag is stored, the already-viewed notice generation lottery process in step S1917 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1913 that the second already-viewed notice flag is not stored (S1913: NO), the process proceeds to step S16.

  That is, in a situation in which the already-viewed notice is already set to be executed based on either the hold information related to winning the first opening 33 or the hold information related to winning the second opening 34. Does not make a new setting for executing the already-viewed notice even if a new hold command is received.

  In step S1914, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first opening 33. If it is determined in step S1914 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33 (S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915, and the total hold is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of suspended pieces measured in the number counter area is two or more.

  If it is determined in step S1915 that the total number of holdings is two or more (S1915: YES), the flow advances to step S1917 to execute the already-viewed notice generation lottery process. Details of the already-viewed notice generation lottery process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1915 that the total number of held items is not two or more (S1915: NO), the held command corresponding process ends without executing the already-viewed notice generation lottery process of step S1917. .

  In step S1914, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on winning in the first opening 33 (S1914: NO), that is, the hold command is the second opening If it is determined that the number has been transmitted based on the winning in No. 34, the process proceeds to step S1916, and it is determined whether or not the number of holdings measured in the second holding number counter area is two or more. .

  If it is determined in step S1916 that the second reserved number is two or more (S1916: YES), the flow proceeds to step S1917 to execute the already-viewed notice generation lottery process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the second reserved number is not equal to or more than two, the already-visited notice processing is ended without executing the already-visited notice generation lottery process in step S1917.

  In other words, if the hold command that is to be read out this time is transmitted based on winning in the first opening 33, the notice of the already-viewed notice is provided only when the total number of holds is two or more. An occurrence lottery process is executed. On the other hand, if the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the second start-up port 34, the sense of sight is limited only when the second hold number is two or more. A notice generation lottery process is executed. The reason is that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already-viewed notice is executed using two or more game times. In the case where the hold command is transmitted based on the winning in the second start port 34, the reason why the second hold number is used as the basis is that the second start port 34 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This is because the hold information acquired by winning the prize is subject to the jackpot lottery in preference to the hold information acquired by winning the first opening 33.

<Looking-up process for occurrence of already-ready notice>
Next, the already-viewed notice generation lottery process will be described. The already-viewed notice generation lottery process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a sub-routine of the already-viewed notice notice processing (FIG. 30: S1917).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the already viewed notice generation lottery process. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the pending command to be read this time corresponds to the jackpot or the occurrence of the reach. In step S2001, when it is determined that neither the jackpot nor the reach has occurred (S2001: NO), the already-viewed notice generation lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that it corresponds to the occurrence of a jackpot or a reach (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, where the random number counter for the already-visited notice is read from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light-side RAM 94. The value (numerical information) is read out, and at the same time, the read-out notice notice generation table stored in the read-out notice notice generation table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to, and in step S2003, the read-out notice notice notice generation table is used. It is determined whether or not the random number counter value corresponds to the already-viewed notice occurrence winning.

  In addition, the probability that the already-viewed notice is generated can be arbitrarily set. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a hold command corresponding to a jackpot is received, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to refer to the jackpot already-viewed notice generation table, and The notice generation table is set so that the reservation notice occurrence wins with a probability of 7/10. On the other hand, when the hold command corresponding to the occurrence of the reach is received, it is configured to refer to the already-viewed notice notice generation table for the reach. The setting is made so that the suspension notice is generated with a probability of 1.

  In step S2003, when it is determined that the already-viewed notice random number counter value does not correspond to the already-viewed notice occurrence winning, the present-viewed notice generation lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the already-viewed notice random number counter value corresponds to the already-viewed notice occurrence winning (S2003: YES), the condition for occurrence of the already-viewed notice is satisfied. , And the process proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2004, a process of determining an announcement effect for an already-announced notice is executed. Specifically, the random number counter value for announcement effect (numerical information) is read from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94, and is stored in the notice effect effect notice table storage area 93c of the sound-light side ROM 93 for the already-visited notice. By referring to the notice effect table for the notice effect, the notice effect for the notice effect corresponding to the random number counter value for the notice effect is determined. The notice effect table for the noticed feeling notice includes the contents of the notice effect which can be executed within the shortest display time among the display time stored in the display time table of the main ROM 63, and the random number counter for the notice effect. Values are stored in association with each other. In addition, in this embodiment, although it was set as the notice effect for the notice feeling notice using the random number counter value for the notice effect determined by the lottery and the notice effect table for the notice notice notice, the notice effect for the notice notice notice was determined. The given predetermined announcement effect may be used as the announcement effect for the already-viewed notice. In this case, the predetermined announcement effect is an announcement effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times stored in the display duration time table of the main ROM 63. In addition, for example, the notice effect for the noticed feeling notice this time is notice notice effect A, and the notice effect for the noticeable notice notice to be determined when the occurrence condition of the noticeable notice notice is satisfied next time is notice notice effect B. In addition, the order of the announcement effect for the already-sensed announcement to be determined may be set in advance. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can intentionally and actively determine the type and content of the announcement effect for the already-viewed announcement to be executed in each game time by employing various methods.

  After executing step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the determined type information of the notice effect for the noticed notice notice is stored in the noticeable notice notice effect storage area 94d of the sound light side RAM 94 in the sound light side RAM94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In step S2006, a stop symbol determination process for the already-viewed notice is executed. More specifically, the stop symbol random number counter value (numerical information) is read from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94, and is stored in the stop-symbol table storage area 93d for the noticeable feeling notice in the sound light ROM 93. The stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol random number counter value is determined with reference to the stop symbol table for the noticed feeling notice. Note that a stop symbol for a departure result is determined as the stop symbol for the already-visited notice. After executing Step S2006, the process proceeds to Step S2007, and the determined type information of the stopped symbol for the already-visited notice is stored in the sound-light-side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first opening 33. If it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33 (S2008: YES), the process proceeds to step S2009, and the sound light is emitted. The first sighted notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the side RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2010, in which the information stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound light RAM 94 is set in the already-viewed notice counter area of the sound light RAM 94. Thereafter, the already-viewed notice notice process ends. As a result, a state in which the already-viewed notice is to be executed is set with the hold information relating to the first starting port 33 as an opportunity.

  If it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command to be read this time has not been transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33 (S2008: NO), the process proceeds to step S2011, and the sound light side The second sighted notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S2012, in which the information stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is set in the already-viewed notice counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the already-viewed notice notice process ends. As a result, a state in which the already-viewed notice is to be executed is set with the hold information relating to the second start port 34 as an opportunity.

<Direction setting process>
Next, the effect setting processing will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 26: S1504).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game round. . Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

  In step S2101, the variation command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of reach and information on the display continuation time are specified from the command, and the type command received this time is read, and the 16R certain variation hit is read from the command. The information of the jackpot lottery result, such as the information, the information of the 8R certain jackpot, the information of the 16R normal jackpot, the information of the 8R normal jackpot, or the information of the outcome result is specified. Then, in step S2101, from the specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and the display duration And stores the obtained information in the register of the MPU 92 on the light / light side. After executing Step S2101, the process proceeds to Step S2102.

  In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the already-viewed notice flag is stored in the sound-light-side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S2102 that the already-viewed notice flag is stored (S2102: YES), that is, if the condition for generating the already-viewed notice is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2103, and the already-viewed notice is set. The effect setting process corresponding to the notice is executed. In this process, in the current game round in which the already-viewed notice is executed, the notice effect for the already-viewed notice determined in S2004 of FIG. 31 is executed, and the already-notified notice determined in S2006 of FIG. 31 is performed. Is set to execute a symbol stop effect using the stop symbol for the game. The details of the effect setting process corresponding to the already-viewed notice will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S2102 that the already-viewed notice flag is not stored (S2102: NO), the process advances to step S2104 to execute a notice effect generation lottery process. In the announcement effect generation lottery process, whether or not to execute a normal announcement effect in the current game round is determined by lottery. The normal announcement effect can occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is performed more than the reach display is not performed Are also set to occur with high probability. In addition, in the announcement effect generation lottery process, a game effect corresponding to the jackpot is more likely to generate a notice effect than a game time corresponding to a missed result, and further, a notice effect with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. A lottery. After executing Step S2104, the process proceeds to Step S2105.

  In step S2105, as a result of the announcement effect generation lottery process in step S2104, it is determined whether or not the announcement effect occurrence has been won. If it is determined in step S2105 that the notice effect has been won (step S2105: YES), the process proceeds to step S2106, and the selected notice effect is set to be executed in the current game round. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the announcement effect has not been won (step S2105: NO), the process proceeds to step S2107 without executing step S2106.

  In step S2107, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R ordinary jackpot, or 8R ordinary jackpot, the same symbol on the activated line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same symbol combination can be selected. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter. A configuration having a higher rate may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. In addition, the combination of the symbol “7” is selected only in the case of the 16R probability change big hit. When the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is an outlier, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the change command. If it is determined that the combination corresponds to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After performing Step S2107, the process proceeds to Step S2108.

  In step S2108, a process for determining a fluctuation display pattern of the current game is executed. In the process, the information on the display duration of the current game is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the variation display time included in the display duration, Then, the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop symbol specified in step S2107 is selected. In selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound light ROM 93 is referred to.

  After executing the effect setting processing corresponding to the already-viewed notice in step S2103, or after setting the variable display pattern in step S2108, the process advances to step S2109.

  In step S2109, the type information of the announcement effect, the number of times of execution of the announcement effect, the type information of the stop symbol, and the type information of the variable display pattern set in the current game time are set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step S2110 to transmit the effect command to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111, and after performing the updating process at the start of the fluctuation, the present effect setting process ends. Details of the update process at the start of the change will be described later.

<Direction setting processing corresponding to the already-notified notice>
Next, a description will be given of an effect setting process corresponding to the already-viewed notice. The effect setting processing corresponding to the already-notified notice is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting processing (FIG. 32: S2103).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the processing for setting an effect corresponding to the already-viewed notice. As described above, this setting process is a process that is executed when the current game time is one of a plurality of game times for executing the already-viewed notice, and is executed in the current game time. This is a process for setting a notice effect, a symbol stop effect, and a variable display pattern. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the setting processing will be described.

  In step S2201, the type information of the notice effect for the noticed notice stored in the notice effect notice storage area 94d in the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S2202, where the type information of the stop symbol for the already-viewed notice stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2203.

  In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the already-viewed notice notice counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is “1”. That is, it is determined whether or not the game time executed this time is a game time related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the already-viewed notice. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game times related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the already-notified notice are the game times related to the jackpot or the occurrence of the reach. Therefore, in the case of the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice, a relatively long display duration is set.

  In step S2203, when it is determined that the value stored in the already-viewed notice counter area is not “1” (S2203: NO), that is, when the game to be executed this time is under the condition that the already-viewed notice is generated. If it is not the game time related to the held information that has been satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2204, and the notice effect for the already-viewed notice grasped in step S2201 can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game time executed this time. It is determined whether or not.

  In step S2204, if it is determined that the notice effect for the already-viewed notice cannot be executed a plurality of times within the display continuation time (S2204: NO), the process proceeds to step S2205, and the notice effect for the already-viewed notice is set to 1 Set to run multiple times. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2208.

  In step S2204, if it is determined that the notice effect for the already-viewed notice can be executed a plurality of times within the display continuation time (S2204: YES), the process proceeds to step S2206, and the notice effect for the already-viewed notice is performed. Set to run multiple times. More specifically, when the notice effect for the already-viewed notice can be executed twice within the display continuation time, the notice effect is set to be executed twice, and the noticeable effect is set within the display continuation time. If the notice effect for the notice can be executed three times, the notice effect is set to be executed three times. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set so that the notice effect for the notice of the already-viewed notice is executed up to three times in one game time. However, the maximum number of notice effects performed in one game may be set to one or two, or may be set to four or more.

  Further, the number of executable notice effects for the already-visited notice within the display duration time in the current game time is M times, and the actual number of notices for the already-visual notice notice in the current game times is N. If the number of times is M, the relationship between M and N is not limited to M = N. As long as N satisfies the relationship of M ≧ N ≧ 1, the value of N can be set arbitrarily. For example, if the number of executable notice effects for the already-visited notice within the display duration time in the current game time is five, the actual number of noticeable effects for the already-visited notice is five to It can be set arbitrarily within one time. The value of N can be determined by various methods, such as determination by lottery or determination using table data that associates M and N. In this way, the number of executions of the effect element having the same content can be intentionally and actively determined.

  After executing step S2206, the process proceeds to step S2207, and in this game round, after performing a notice effect for the already-visited notice, the stop symbol for the already-visited notice grasped in step S2202 is pseudo-stopped. Set to execute a symbol pseudo stop effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2208.

  After executing step S2205 or step S2207, in step S2208, the stop symbol for the already-viewed notice notice grasped in step S2202 is set as the stop symbol in the current game round. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2212.

  In step S2203, when it is determined that the value stored in the counter for the sense of notice notice is “1” (S2201: YES), that is, the game executed this time is the condition for occurrence of the sense of notice notice. If it is the game time related to the hold information that is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2209, and the notice effect for the already-viewed notice is set to be executed once, and the above-described suggestive effect, battle effect, jackpot or The result effect corresponding to the off result is set to be executed in the current game round. As described above, since the game times related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the already-viewed notice are the game times related to the jackpot or the reach, a relatively long display duration is set. When selecting each type of suggestive effect, battle effect, and result effect, within the time obtained by subtracting the time required for the notice effect for the already-viewed notice from the display continuation time set in this game time Select an executable combination of effects. After executing Step S2209, the process proceeds to Step S2210.

  In step S2210, in the current game round, after performing the notice effect for the already-visited notice, a symbol pseudo stop effect for pseudo-stopping the stop symbol for the already-visited notice grasped in step S2202 is executed. Set to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2211.

  In step S2211, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the current jackpot lottery is set. The details of the stop symbol setting processing are the same as the processing in step S2107 in FIG. 32, and thus description thereof will be omitted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2212.

  In step S2212, a process for determining the fluctuation display pattern of the current game is executed. In the process, the information on the display duration of the current game is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the variation display time included in the display duration, Then, a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop symbol for the already-viewed notice specified in step S2202 is selected. In selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound light ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S2212, this setting process ends.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of the fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the change is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 32: S2111).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the updating process at the start of the change. In the processing from step S2301 to step S2311 described below, the counter values in the various reserved number counter areas are updated with the start of the game round, and processing relating to the deletion of the jackpot holding flag is executed.

  As described above, the jackpot hold flag includes a jackpot in the hold information held and stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 60. This flag is stored when the corresponding suspension information is included. In addition, when the first deletion counter area stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the order in which the hold information is to be started in the game round in the first result display section hold area Ra. Is stored. In addition, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the second deletion counter area, the order in which the hold information is to be started in the game round in the second result display unit hold area Rb is Is stored. Therefore, the case where both the value of the first erasing counter area and the value of the second erasing counter area are “0” as the initial values means that the first result display section holding area Ra of the main control device 60 or This means that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not included in the hold information held in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. In this case, the jackpot hold flag is deleted. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the update processing at the start of the fluctuation will be described.

  In step S2301, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, it is determined whether the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2302 that the command is the first variation command (S2302: YES), the flow advances to step S2303 to decrement the held number stored in the first held number counter area of the sound-side RAM 94 by one. Thus, the information of the first reserved number counter area is updated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2304.

  In step S2304, it is determined whether the value stored in the first erasure counter area of the sound-light-side RAM 94 is 1 or more. If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is 1 or more (S2304: YES), the process proceeds to step S2305, where the value stored in the first erasure counter area is determined. Is updated by subtracting 1 from the information in the first erasing counter area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is not 1 or more (S2304: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2305, 09 to S2311.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the command is not the first variation command (S2302: NO), that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the process proceeds to step S2306, where the sound light RAM 94 The information of the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the reserved number stored in the second reserved number counter area is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2307, it is determined whether the value stored in the second erasing counter area of the sound-light-side RAM 94 is equal to or greater than “1”. If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erase counter area is 1 or more (S2307: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308, where the value stored in the second erase counter area is determined. Is updated by subtracting 1 from the information in the second erase counter area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is not equal to or greater than 1 (S2307: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2308 and 09 to S2311.

  In step S2309, it is determined whether the value stored in the first erasure counter area is “0”. If it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is “0” (S2309: YES), the process proceeds to step S2310. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is not “0” (S2309: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2310 and S2311. .

  In step S2310, it is determined whether the value stored in the second erase counter area is “0”. If it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is “0” (S2310: YES), the flow advances to step S2311 to clear the jackpot holding flag. That is, when the value stored in the first erasure counter area is “0” and the value stored in the second erasure counter area is “0”, the jackpot hold flag is deleted. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is not “0” (S2310: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2311.

  In the processing from step S2312 to step S2317 to be described next, processing related to erasure of the already-viewed notice flag is executed. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described.

  In step S2312, it is determined whether the value stored in the already-viewed notice counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is equal to or greater than “1”. In step S2312, if it is determined that the value stored in the counter for noticed notice notice is not greater than or equal to "1" (S2312: NO), the updating process at the start of the fluctuation is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the already-viewed notice counter area is equal to or greater than “1” (S2312: YES), the process proceeds to step S2313.

  In step S2313, the information of the already-visited notice counter area is updated so that the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area of the sound-light RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2314.

  In step S2314, it is determined whether the value stored in the already-viewed notice counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is “0”. If it is determined in step S2314 that the value stored in the already-viewed notice notice counter area is not “0”, the update process at the start of the change is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value stored in the already-viewed notice counter area is “0”, the flow proceeds to step S2315.

  In step S2315, it is determined whether the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2315 that the command is the first variation command, the process advances to step S2316 to delete the first-viewed notice flag in the sound-light-side RAM 94. Thereafter, the updating process at the start of the fluctuation is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2315 that the command is not the first variation command, that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the process proceeds to step S2317, and the second viewing of the sound-light side RAM 94 is performed. Clear the notice flag. Thereafter, the updating process at the start of the fluctuation is completed.

<Various processes executed in display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is mainly a main processing that is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off after the power is turned on, and is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interruption signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command interrupt process is executed with priority. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on, and is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

  In step S2401, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2402.

  In step S2402, an interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, an infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Command interrupt processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2501, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instructions.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the drawing processing or the display processing of the image is not completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area storing the image information therein. Hereinafter, the details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S2601, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 36), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the effect operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is during the reception period of the press of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the reception period of the press of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed The control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the reception period of the press of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command corresponding process (S2601), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is performed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90 is quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed on the symbol. The drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

  In step S2602, a display setting process is performed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S2601) or the like. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2603.

  In step S2603, task processing is performed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S2602), the type of the character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2604, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S2603), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the immediately preceding V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41 together with a drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S2605 to execute other processing, and then ends the V interrupt processing.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times for the player. It can give a sense of sight (dejab). The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences a jackpot after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is executed in expectation of the effect element of the same content being executed a plurality of times. Every time it is done, he will always pay attention to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the sighted notice is satisfied and the sighted notice is to be executed, the type and content of the effect element to be executed multiple times are intended. Can be set manually. Also, the number of executions of the effect element having the same content can be set intentionally. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the already-viewed notice can be arbitrarily set when a jackpot is won or a reach occurs.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times over time. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an example in which the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times is increased with the passage of time. In the example shown in FIG. 38, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A in the first game time P01, and also executes the effect element A in the next game time P02. The number of elements is one. The pachinko machine 10 further executes an effect element B in addition to the effect element A in the game time P02, and executes the effect element A and the effect element B in the next game time P03. The number of effect elements of the content is two. That is, the pachinko machine 10 increases the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times with the passage of time. In this way, the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases with time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with time.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 38, control for increasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times has been described. However, control for decreasing the number of effect elements may be performed. The pachinko machine 10 increases / decreases the expectation of the player by increasing / decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and gives an inflection to the expectation. You can make a change.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, a second embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment lies in the processing content related to the already-viewed notice. In the following description, the already-viewed notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a time chart showing an example of the already-viewed notice performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 39A and 39B show two examples of the already-notified notice in the present embodiment, Example 1 and Example 2. FIG.

  In Example 1, a game ball wins in the first starting port 33 at a timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, and the reserved information related to the prize is a condition for generating a noticeable notice. It shows the case where it is satisfied. That is, the game time P03 indicated as the third game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice.

  When the hold information related to the game time P03 satisfies the condition for generating the already-notified notice, the pachinko machine 10 sets the game time earlier than the game time P03 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-notified notice. The contents of the game effect A executed in P01 are stored. That is, the pachinko machine 10 stores the content of the game effect A to be executed in the subsequently executed game P01 after determining that the hold information of the game P03 satisfies the occurrence of the notice-of-view notice. Then, the game time P02 is a game time after the game time P01 in which the content of the game effect A is stored, and is a game time P02 which is a game time before the game time P03 related to the hold information that satisfies the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice. In the game time P03, the contents of the game effect A stored in the game time P01 are reproduced.

  In the first embodiment, the “effect element” having the same content is executed a plurality of times as the already-notified notice, but in the present embodiment, the effect element is composed of a combination of the effect elements executed in the game time P01. "Gaming production" is executed a plurality of times as one unit. That is, for a certain period in each of the game times P02 and P03, the game effect exactly the same as the game time P01 is reproduced as it is. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately give the player a sense of being viewed.

  Further, in the game time P03, after performing the game effect A, a suggestion effect, a battle effect, and a result effect (a victory effect in this example) are executed as in the first embodiment. Then, after the big hit symbol is stopped in the game time P03, a big hit effect is executed.

  Specific processing will be described. If it is determined that the hold information related to the game time P03 satisfies the condition for occurrence of the already-viewed notice, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the game effect A for the game effect A of the game time P01 to be executed thereafter. To store various setting data. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware such as various lamps 47 that actually execute the effect, data for command setting transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like.

  After the end of the game P01, the sound emission control device 90 sets the hardware (various types) that actually executes the game effect based on the stored various setting data for executing the game effect A when starting the game P02. The control of the lamp 47 and the speaker 46 is performed. Immediately before the start of the game time P02, the game effect B to be executed is determined based on the hold information related to the game time P02, but the sound emission control device 90 sets the game effect B to be hard at the start of the game time P02. The game effect A is preferentially executed without being executed in a manner that appears in the behavior of the wear. The processing based on the setting data of the game effect B is executed as internal processing within a range that does not appear in the behavior of the hardware (the various lamps 47, the speakers 46, and the like) for executing the game effect.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (A), when the display duration of the game time P02 is longer than the time for executing the game effect A, the sound emission control device 90 sets the game time in the game time P02. Simultaneously with the end of the execution of the effect A, the processing based on the setting data of the game effect B, which has been executed as an internal process within a range not appearing as the behavior of the hardware, is switched to a process appearing as the behavior of the hardware. That is, in the game time P02, the player recognizes that the game effect B has been executed from the middle after the game effect A has been executed. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 executes the already-viewed notice shown in Example 1.

  Next, Example 2 of the already-viewed notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Example 2, similarly to Example 1, at the timing when the total number of held pieces CRN is 2, a game ball wins at the first starting port 33, the total number of held pieces CRN becomes 3, and the hold information related to the prize is viewed. This shows a case where the conditions for generating a feeling notice are satisfied. That is, the game time P13 indicated as the third game time is a game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice.

  In Example 2, the sound emission control device 90 stores the contents of the game effect C1, which is a game effect of a part of the game effect C0 executed in the game time P11. Then, the game time P12 is a game time after the game time P11 in which the content of the game effect C1 is stored, and is a game time P12 which is a game time before the game time P13 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice. And in the game time P13, the content of the stored game effect C1 is reproduced. Specifically, since the display continuation time of the game time P12 is shorter than the time required for the execution of the game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 determines in the game time P12 that the game effect C1 has a part of the stored game effect C1. The game effect C1a, which is an effect, is reproduced. On the other hand, since the display duration of the game P13 is longer than the time required for executing the game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 reproduces the entire contents of the stored game effect C1 in the game P13. In the game time P13, after performing the game effect C1, a suggestion effect, a battle effect, and a result effect (a victory effect in this example) are executed. Then, after the big hit symbol is stopped in the game time P03, a big hit effect is executed.

  As a specific process, when it is determined that the hold information related to the game time P13 satisfies the condition for generating the already-notified notice, the sound emission control device 90 executes the game executed after the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied. Various kinds of setting data for executing the game effect C1, which is the game effect for a part of the game effect C in the time P11, are stored. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware such as various lamps 47 that actually execute the effect, data for command setting transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like. In the present embodiment, when the length (time) of the game effect to be stored is set in advance, the display duration time of the game effect C0 is longer than the set length. A game effect C1, which is a game effect of the period, is stored.

  Furthermore, since the display continuation time of the game time P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the stored game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 has a part of the stored game effect C1 in the game time P12. The game effect C1a is reproduced. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 gives the notice of already-viewed feeling shown in Example 2.

  In the above description, the sound emission control device 90 stores the setting data transmitted to the display control device 100 to reproduce the game effect executed in the game time P01 in the game times after the game time P01. However, the display control device 100 stores the moving image data reproduced by the symbol display device 41 in the game time P01 in the buffer as it is, and in the game times subsequent to the game time P01, the stored moving image data is displayed again. The device 100 may transmit the symbol to the symbol display device 41 for playback.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the contents of the executed game effects are stored and reproduced, so that at least a part of the period, the game effects having completely the same contents are played. Will experience it. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately give the player a sense of being viewed.

  Also, as in the first embodiment, the player who has recognized the feeling of being seen may have a special meaning for the feeling of being seen, for example, there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Have a sense of expectation. When the player experiences that the privilege is given after the game effect of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the game effect is executed in expectation that the game effect of the same content is executed a plurality of times. Every time, he comes to pay attention to game production with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the game effect to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and (B), in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 performs the same suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the game effect having the same content has been reproduced. It is executed after the game effect of the content is reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the game effect of the same content has been reproduced, and to convince the player that the reproduction of the game effect of the same content has a special meaning. be able to.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select an operation acceptance effect including a content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation of the effect operation button 24 as a game effect target to be stored and reproduced. When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, the operation accepting effect may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect as the game effect to be stored and reproduced, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to surely give the player a sense of sight.

C. Third embodiment:
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment lies in the processing content related to the already-viewed notice. In the following description, the already-viewed notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a time chart showing an example of the already-viewed notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 40A and 40B show examples 1 and 2 which are two examples of the already-viewed notice in the present embodiment. In the first example, at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 3, a game ball wins in the first starting port 33, the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the reserved information related to the winning is the condition for generating the noticeable notice. It shows the case where it is satisfied. That is, the game time P04 indicated as the fourth game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first example, when the hold information related to the game time P04 satisfies the condition for generating the noticeable notice, the pachinko machine 10 continues the game before the game time P04 related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the noticeable notice. The total time of the shortest display continuation times that can be determined as the display continuation times T1, T2, T3, and T4 of the game times P01, the game times P02, the game times P03, and the game times P04, which are the plurality of game times, is calculated. The display duration of each of the game times P01 to P04 actually determined is Tre (Tre = T1 + T2 + T3 + T4), and the shortest display duration of the game times P01 to P04 can be determined as the display duration. Assuming that the total time is Tsum, the relationship of Tsum ≦ Tre holds.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 displays an effect element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times in the calculated total time Tsum until the game time P04 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice is completed. Execute multiple times. In the example 1 shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 is an effect element having the same contents that can be executed a plurality of times within a time Tsum that is equal to or shorter than a time Tre, which is the display continuation time of each of the game times P01 to P04 actually determined. A, effect element B, and effect element C are executed. In the game time P04, after performing the game effect A, a suggestion effect, a battle effect, and a result effect (a victory effect in this example) are executed.

  The pachinko machine 10 of Example 1 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice within the time Tsum. More specifically, production elements to be executed a plurality of times, such as first production element A only, then production element A and production element B, and then production element A, production element B and production element C, The number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times is increased over time.

  Further, as illustrated, in the pachinko machine 10 of Example 1, the effect element A to be executed for the second, third, and fourth times is executed across game times. In other words, the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbol stops is different from the timing at which one effect element A ends. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display surface 41a when the already-viewed notice is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the already-viewed notice is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, a symbol change display and a stop display are executed. The change display and the stop display of the symbols in the display area 41aS are executed in the same cycle as the display continuation time of each of the game times P01 to P04.

  On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, a display corresponding to the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C is displayed. As the effect element A, for example, an effect element based on a video using the entire display area 41aL is displayed. More specifically, a moving image is displayed as a background image in the display area 41aL, or a moving image including a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image is displayed. The effect element B and the effect element C include, for example, a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a normal background image. A background change announcement effect that changes to a different mode from the time, a character announcement effect that causes a predetermined character to execute a predetermined operation, a lamp emission effect that emits various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol row with a predetermined scroll pattern A design effect of changing a symbol sequence to be changed, a reach effect of changing the remaining one symbol sequence in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and the like. In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect performed after the end of the game round P04 in the pachinko machine 10 is executed by displaying a moving image using the entire display surface 41a.

  As described with reference to FIG. 41, for example, the display surface 41a is divided into the display area 41aS and the display area 41aL, and the display of the symbol change and the stop display in the display area 41aS and the effect element in the display area 41aL are performed. By performing the display at different periods, the period of the variable display and the stop display of the symbol (that is, the period synchronized with the actual display continuation time), the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C are executed. It is possible to make the period different from the period.

  Next, Example 2 of the already-viewed notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Example 2, similarly to Example 1, at the timing when the total number of held pieces CRN is 3, a game ball wins at the first starting port 33, the total number of held pieces CRN becomes 4, and the hold information related to the winning is regarded as already viewed. This shows a case where the conditions for generating a feeling notice are satisfied. That is, the game time P14 indicated as the fourth game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice.

  In Example 2, the time required for the effect element A to be executed a plurality of times is longer than the display continuation time of the game time P11. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes one effect element A across game times. The pachinko machine 10 of Example 2 executes the effect element A as an effect element that can be executed three times in the shortest display duration total time Tsum that can be determined as the display duration of the four game times P11 to P14. . As shown in Example 2, the number of game times required to execute the same effect element a plurality of times (in Example 2, four game times) and the number of executions of the same effect element (Example 2) Then, the effect element A may be different from three times). The type of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times as the same content and the number of times of execution may be determined according to the value of the calculated total time Tsum. In this case, the type of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times as the same content and the number of times of execution may be determined using the table data in which the total time Tsum is associated with the type of the effect element and the number of executions.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same content that can be executed a plurality of times in the shortest total display duration time (Tsum) that can be determined as the display duration time of each game time. Is performed, so that one of the effect elements to be executed a plurality of times can be completed within the display duration (T1, T2, T3, T4) which is the time actually required for one game time. Not restricted. That is, the effect element having the same content can be executed a plurality of times over a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice. As shown in Example 2, it is also possible to execute one effect element A to be executed a plurality of times over game times. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect element to be executed a plurality of times without considering the relationship between the execution time for one effect element and the display continuation time for one game time.

  Further, since the effect element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times is executed a plurality of times in the total time (Tsum) of the shortest display duration that can be determined, the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. The required time is equal to or less than the total display time (Tr) of the actual game times. Therefore, when the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times over a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice, the time runs short. By avoiding, it is possible to reliably execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least two times), so that the player is assumed that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A feeling (dejab) can be given. The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. When the player experiences that the benefit is given after the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is executed in expectation that the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times. Every time, I come to pay attention to the production elements with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and (B), in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 performs the same suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been reproduced. Is executed after the effect element of the content is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to have a special meaning that the execution of the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Can be convinced.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation accepting effect element including the content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation of the effect operation button 24 as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect element having different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to surely give the player a sense of sight.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a combination of a display of a moving image as a background image of the display area 41aL, and a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image as effect elements to be executed a plurality of times with the same content. Display of moving images, cut-in notice effect, notice effect by displaying an object image such as a predetermined character in front of the background image, background change notice effect that changes the background image to a mode different from normal, reach effect, The player has already seen the player using various effect elements, such as an effect by a physically operating accessory provided on the front door frame 14 or the game board 30, an effect by lighting or blinking by various lamps 47, and the like. Can give a feeling. Therefore, the player's attention as to whether or not the same effect element is executed a plurality of times can be directed to various effect elements.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times. In Example 1 of the present embodiment, the effect element A is first executed, the number of effect elements having the same content is one, and then the number of effect elements having the same content is executed by executing the game effect B to two. Then, the effect element C is executed, and the number of effect elements having the same content becomes three. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, but control may be performed to decrease the number. The pachinko machine 10 increases / decreases the expectation of the player by increasing / decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and gives an inflection to the expectation. You can make a change.

  In addition, in Example 1 of the present embodiment, at first, only the effect element A, the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C are viewed. The same content to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the condition for generating the feeling notice is satisfied to when the game time (game time P04) related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the noticeable feeling notice ends is completed. The number of presentation elements is increased over time. Therefore, the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases as time elapses, so that the player's expectation can be increased as time elapses.

D. Fourth embodiment:
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment lies in the processing content related to the already-viewed notice. In the following description, the already-viewed notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted. Hereinafter, specific processing in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a time chart showing an example of the already-viewed notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the first embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice based on the hold information is performed is performed before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the determination as to whether or not the condition for generating the already-viewed notice based on the hold information is satisfied is performed when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery. That is, it is determined whether or not the condition for generating the already-viewed notice based on the hold information is satisfied, and a jackpot lottery based on the hold information is performed immediately before the start of the game round P01 according to the hold information.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as an embodiment of the already-visited notice, a plurality of executions of the effect element having the same content are performed over a plurality of game times. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, as a mode of the already-viewed notice, an effect element A, an effect element B, and an effect element C that can be executed a plurality of times during the display duration of the game time are displayed. The game is executed a plurality of times in one game time P01 related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-viewed notice. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice in the game time P01. More specifically, production elements to be executed a plurality of times, such as first production element A only, then production element A and production element B, and then production element A, production element B and production element C, The number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times is increased over time.

  As in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect element A a plurality of times, with the suggestion effect indicating to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Run later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 executes a battle effect and a result effect (victory effect) after executing the suggestion effect. Then, after the end of the game time P01, a big hit effect is executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in at least one game time, the effect element that can be executed a plurality of times in the display duration of the game time with the same content is performed a plurality of times. Since the execution is performed, the player can be provided with the sense of being viewed in one game round. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player feels that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given. The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times after executing the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. I do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to have a special meaning that the execution of the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Can be convinced.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation accepting effect element including the content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation of the effect operation button 24 as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect element having different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to surely give the player a sense of sight.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the effect element A is first executed, the number of effect elements having the same content is one, and then the game effect B is executed, and the number of effect elements having the same content is two. And the number of effect elements having the same content becomes three. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, but control may be performed to decrease the number. The pachinko machine 10 increases / decreases the expectation of the player by increasing / decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and gives an inflection to the expectation. You can make a change.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the same effect to be executed a plurality of times, such as only the effect element A first, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C, The number of presentation elements of the content is increased over time. Therefore, the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases as time elapses, so that the player's expectation can be increased as time elapses.

E. FIG. Fifth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment lies in the processing content related to the already-viewed notice. In the following description, the already-viewed notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  In the above embodiment, the control of the display continuation time of each game is not performed based on the determination as to whether or not to execute the feeling-of-view notice. In the present embodiment, in the case where the already-visited notice is executed, at least two game times out of the game times before the game times related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the already-visual notice, Control is performed so as to secure a display duration of a predetermined length. Then, in each game time in which the display duration of the predetermined length is secured, the effect element having the same content that can be executed within the display duration of the secured predetermined length is executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of processing executed in main control device 60 and sound emission control device 90 of pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the processing that the voice light emission control device 90 has executed as the hold command corresponding process in the first embodiment. That is, the main controller 60 executes the already-viewed notice generation lottery process. Then, when the lottery of the notice of the already-visited announcement is won, for example, when the notice of the already-visited notice is executed by using the three game times, the display continuation time of the three game times is determined. Reserve a predetermined length for the execution of the notice. Specifically, in the main control device 60, when determining the display continuation time of each of the three game times to execute the already-viewed notice, the value of the variation type counter CS relating to each of the three game times, In the collation with the display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, as the display duration table to be used for the comparison, the execution of the already-viewed notice is previously stored in the display duration table storage area 63d. Use the display duration table.

  The main controller 60 controls and determines the display duration of the three game times to the length for executing the already-notified notice, and then emits a sound using the determined information of the display duration of each game as a command. It is transmitted to the control device 90. The sound light emission control device 90 determines the effect element of the same content that can be executed within the display duration time of each game time, the length of which has been ensured by the main control device 60 for the execution of the already-viewed notice. By doing so, the length of the display continuation time of the game times can be controlled for executing the already-viewed notice.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a display continuation time of a predetermined length is secured for execution of the already-viewed notice, and a display continuation time of the predetermined length is secured. Since the same effect elements that can be executed in each game time are executed, the time required to execute the same effect element can be avoided in each game time, and the same contents can be surely executed in each game time. Can be performed.

  Further, as the effect element used for the already-viewed notice, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a background image Background change announcement effect to change to a mode different from the normal state, a character announcement effect to perform a predetermined operation on a predetermined character, a lamp emission effect to emit various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol array in a predetermined scroll pattern , A reach effect in which the same one symbol is stopped on at least one activated line, and a remaining symbol line is changed, and a symbol stop in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped Direction and the like can be adopted. Since it is possible to give the player a feeling of seeing using various effect elements, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various effect elements. .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times as the already-notified notice is executed after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. I do. Not only can the player be aware that the same content effect element has been executed multiple times, but also that the player has a special meaning that the same content effect element has been executed multiple times. Can be convinced.

  Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times. By increasing / decreasing the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed multiple times, it is possible to increase / decrease the player's expectation or to give a change to the player's expectation, such as giving an inflection to the expectation. it can.

  Furthermore, during the period from when it is determined that the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied to the end of the game round related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for occurrence of the already-visual notice, the same effect to be executed a plurality of times is performed. The number of elements may be increased over time. Since the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, first, the display continuation time of each game time for executing the already-viewed notice is determined, and thereafter, the effect element to be executed as the already-viewed notice based on the determined display duration is Although it has been determined, other processing modes can be adopted without being limited to such a processing mode.

  For example, the effect element to be executed as the already-notified notice may be determined first, and thereafter, the display continuation time of a length capable of executing the effect element to be executed as the already-notified notice may be secured in each game. . As a specific process, for example, when the main control device 60 determines that the already-notified notice is to be executed by performing the already-notified notice generation lottery process, the effect of the same content to be executed first as the already-notified notice is performed first. Determine the element. After that, the main controller 60 secures a display continuation time long enough to execute the effect element having the same content as the already-notified notice in each game. Then, the main control device 60 transmits to the audio light emission control device 90 as a command the display continuation time of each game time for executing the already-visited notice and the content of the effect element to be executed as the already-visited notice.

  By adopting such a processing form, it is possible to secure a display duration time of a length that can execute the effect element having the same content in each game, so that the time required to execute the same effect element Can be avoided in each game time, and the effect element having the same content can be reliably executed in each game time.

F. Sixth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information, and the processing content related to the already-viewed notice. In the following description, the already-viewed notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information and a function of executing a time-linked effect element that is an effect element that is continuously executed over time based on the acquired time information. . In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes an RTC module (RTC: Real Time Clock) and acquires time information from the RTC module. The acquisition of the time information is not limited to the acquisition from the RTC module. For example, another method that is technically possible for the acquisition of the time information, such as the acquisition from outside the pachinko machine 10, may be adopted.

  In the present description, among the effect elements executed by the pachinko machine 10, an effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the time information is referred to as a “time-linked effect element”, and is based on the time information. An effect element that is executed without being called is called a “non-time-linked effect element”.

  FIG. 44 is a time chart showing an example of the already-viewed notice performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 also shows, as a comparison object, a time-linked effect element that is installed in the same game hall as the pachinko machine 10 and that is executed by another pachinko machine of the same model as the pachinko machine 10.

  As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines start executing the time-linked effect element at time T0. Then, the pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines continuously execute the time-linked effect element over time. In the present description, another pachinko machine executes a series of time-linked effect elements set in advance. For convenience of explanation, in order to indicate the time position of a series of time-linked production elements, a series of time-linked production elements executed by other pachinko machines include the time position as an index indicating the time position of the time-linked production element. TP1 to TP20 are illustrated. Each time position shown in the drawing is described in a form in which the symbol of “TP” is omitted.

  As illustrated, in the pachinko machine 10, at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 3, a game ball wins in the first starting port 33, the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the pending information related to the winning is regarded as already viewed. This shows a case in which the conditions for generating a feeling notice are satisfied and the notice of feeling is executed. That is, the game time P04 indicated as the fourth game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice.

  The pachinko machine 10 stores, as a specific time position, the time position TP of the time-linked effect element that is executed at the timing when the game turn P01 is started after it is determined that the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice has been satisfied. . In the example shown in FIG. 44, the pachinko machine 10 stores the time position TP3 of the time-linked effect element as a specific time position. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is a game time whose execution is started after it is determined that the condition for generating the already-visited notice has been satisfied, and before the game time P04 according to the hold information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-ready notice. When the timing of starting each of the game times P01, P02, P03, and P04 is a game time, the time-linked effect element is a specific time position stored earlier. The process is executed with the target position TP3 as a start position.

  Further, as shown in the figure, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been satisfied, and executes the non-time-linked effect element together with the time-linked effect element, the time-linked The effect element and the non-time-linked effect element are executed a plurality of times. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that indicates to the player that the same effect element has been executed a plurality of times after executing the effect element (the time-linked effect element and the non-time-linked effect element) a plurality of times. I do. After executing the suggestion effect, a battle effect and a result effect (victory effect) are executed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 can control the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times, only the non-time-linked effect element A in the game time P01, the non-time-linked effect element A and the non-time-linked effect element B, the game time P03 in the game time P02. In the non-time-linked effect element A, the non-time-linked effect element B and the non-time-linked effect element C, and in the game time P04, the non-time-linked effect element A, the non-time-linked effect element B, and the non-time-linked effect element C, The number of non-time-linked effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased with the passage of time.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-linked effect element that is executed during at least a part of the time period is executed a plurality of times, so that an effect with a new interest is provided to the player. Can be provided. Further, since the time-linked effect element that is executed in at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, the player feels that the time-linked effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab) Can be given. The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given.

  Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, the time-linked effect element is executed with the expectation that the time-effect element is executed a plurality of times. At any time, he will always pay attention to the time-linked production elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention of the player to the time-linked effect element that is executed based on the time information. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case where a plurality of pachinko machines having the same characteristics as the pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, as in the other pachinko machines shown in FIG. In the machine 10 and the pachinko machine that does not satisfy the condition for generating the already-viewed notice, even if the same time-linked effect is started from the same time T0, a time difference ( Shift). As a result, in addition to the player of the pachinko machine 10, the players of the surrounding pachinko machines also recognize that the notice of the already-viewed state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, a superior feeling can be given to a player who is playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 that satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes the time-linked effect element starting from the time position TP3, which is a specific time position, in each of the game times P01 to P04, so that the pachinko machine 10 In addition, it is possible to recognize a strong sense of the already-viewed portion after the time position TP3 which is a specific time position of the time-linked effect element. Further, the pachinko machine 10 synchronizes the timing of starting the time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the timing of starting each of the game times (game time P01 to game time P04), thereby playing a stronger sense of sight. Can be given to others.

  Also, assuming that the start position of the time-linked production element to be started at the timing of the start of each game round is set in advance as the process of the already-viewed notice, if any of the time-linked production elements There is a possibility that the already-viewed notice using the time-linked effect element is executed from the temporal position that has not been executed. For example, when the timing of starting each of the game times P01 to P04 is set as a trigger, the time-linked effect element is set to be executed from a specific time position “TP10” every time. The time-linked effect element, which has been executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game time P01 of the game times P04 is started, starts the first game time P01. , The time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific temporal position TP10 that has never been executed. Further, the processing is not executed at the time positions TP3 to TP9.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is executed at the timing when the game time P01 started after executing the processing for determining that the game time P04 satisfies the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been started. The temporal position TP3 of the time-linked effect element is stored as a specific temporal position, and the stored specific temporal position TP3 is stored in the second and subsequent times (game time P02 to game time P04) of multiple executions. Since the start position of the time-linked effect element is set, the second or later time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times from once executed as a continuous series of time-linked effect elements (temporal positions TP1 to TP5). Can be set at the temporal position TP3 as the start position of. Therefore, the time-linked effect element that has been executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game time 01 of the game times P01 to P04 is started is changed to the first time. It is possible to avoid sudden interruption at the timing of the start of the game time P01, and to avoid starting and executing a time-linked effect element from a specific temporal position TP10 that has never been executed. In addition, all parts (time positions TP1 to TP20) of the time-linked effect element are executed, thereby enabling the player to experience all parts of the time-linked effect element.

  Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 also executes the non-time-linked effect element a plurality of times in addition to the time-linked effect element, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can control the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times, the expectation of the player is increased / decreased, or the expectation of the player is changed, for example, by giving an inflection to the expectation. Can be. In the pachinko machine 10, since the number of non-time-linked effect elements increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting that the player has accepted the operation operation button 24 as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the effect element having different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. can do. Further, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element (time-linked effect element, non-time-linked effect element) having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. At the same time, the player can be convinced that the execution of the effect element having the same content a plurality of times has a special meaning.

G. FIG. Seventh embodiment:
The pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments has a configuration in which the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element for the already-notified notice, but the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the already-notified notice. In some cases, a button effect, which is one of the operation acceptance effect elements, may be selected as an effect element for use. In the following, a description will be given of a case where the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the already-notified notice, and executes the button effect a plurality of times.

<Example 1 of notice of feeling already using button production>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow in a case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the already-viewed notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XA1 and XA2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XA.

  When starting the execution of the first button effect XA, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XA1 including the content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player (S2701). In the example illustrated in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and a character and an image for urging the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, presentation mode XA1 may be another mode.

  After the effect XA1 is executed, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2702: YES), the effect XA1 is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. Executes a different effect mode XA2 (S2703). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears in a treasure chest. However, effect mode XA2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2702: NO), the effect mode XA2 is not executed while the effect mode XA1 is executed.

  When the execution of the second button effect XA is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XA1 similarly to the case of the first button effect XA (S2704 or S2707). In the case where the effect mode XA2 was executed when the first button effect XA was executed, after the effect mode XA1 was executed (S2704), there were and no cases where the effect operation button 24 was pressed. In any case (S2705), the effect XA2 is executed (S2706). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2705: YES), the effect mode XA2 is executed with the effect of the effect operation button 24 being pressed ( S2706). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2705: NO), the effect mode XA2 is executed upon the lapse of the predetermined time (S2706).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode XA2 was not executed when the first button effect was executed, after the effect mode XA1 was executed (S2707), the effect operation button 24 was or was not pressed. In any case (S2708), the effect XA1 is not executed and the effect XA2 is not executed.

  When the second button effect XA ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S2709). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to a player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes another effect such as the above-described battle effect.

  When the button effect XA is executed three or more times, the same control as that when the second button effect XA is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestive effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XA. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of presses, etc.). May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-notified notice, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the first button effect XA, the input by the player is performed. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, if the effect mode XA2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XA, and if the effect mode X-like A2 is not executed in the first button effect XA, the input by the player is performed. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, the effect mode XA2 is not executed in the second and subsequent button effect XA. Therefore, even if the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XA to be executed for the first time, the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being viewed (dejab) that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to perform the same operation. It is possible to convince the player that the content button effect XA is executed a plurality of times with special significance. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed by the player within the predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XA, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect XA2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. can do. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XA2 is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the game can be improved. Can be. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XA2 at a predetermined timing without pressing the effect operation button 24 or elapse of a predetermined time.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the already-visited notice when the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied, and performs the button effect XA multiple times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time in which the press of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that each of the button effects performed a plurality of times has pressed the staging operation button 24 at different timings, and the button effect has the same content. Is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not easily feel that the button effect has been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-visited notice, so that the player does not easily feel the already-visited feeling. Can be suppressed. However, when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the already-notified notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, A configuration for displaying parameters may be used.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating a perceived notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and determines whether or not the perceived notice is generated. If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the button effect XA, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, before the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and performs a button effect in one game round related to the hold information. XA may be executed a plurality of times.

  The pachinko machine 10 may include a change unit that changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when there is a press (that is, a mode that is depressed by pressing). Then, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed (S2705: NO), and when the effect mode XA2 is executed (S2706), the changing means presses the effect operation button 24. It is good to change to the mode in the case. If such a change means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game, and even if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed, the effect mode XA2 is changed. Being executed can be persuasive. The changing means can be realized by, for example, providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. .

  Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation accepting means, a stick or lever operated by the player to move forward and backward or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, and the like may be employed. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XA will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when the button effect XA is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for the already-viewed notice. In step S2801, it is determined whether the first-time execution flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94. The first execution completed flag is a state in which the notice effect (button effect XA) for the notice of notice is already executed once after the notice of notice notice flag is stored, that is, after the condition for generating the notice of notice of notice is satisfied. This is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 whether or not the processing has been completed.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that the first-time execution completed flag is not stored (S2801: NO), that is, if the button effect XA has not been executed even once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S2802 to cause the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XA1 described above. The production mode XA1 includes a content indicating that the production operation button 24 is pressed for the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2803.

  In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2803: YES), the process proceeds to step S2804, where the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect effecting means are described above. The effect mode XA2 is executed. After executing step S2804, the process advances to step S2805 to store the button press flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound-light-side RAM 94. The button press flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XA is executed. After executing Step S2805, the process proceeds to Step S2807.

  If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2803: NO), the flow advances to step S2806 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2806: NO), the process returns to step S2803, and determines whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2806: YES), that is, if the staging operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, step S2804 and step S2805 are not executed, and step S2805 is executed. The process proceeds to S2807.

  In step S2807, after the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, the first button effect XA ends.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that the first-time execution flag is stored (S2801: YES), that is, if the button effect XA has already been executed at least once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S2808, and causes the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XA1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2809.

  In step S2809, it is determined whether or not the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94. In step S2809, when it is determined that the button press flag is not stored (S2809: NO), that is, when the first button effect XA is executed and the effect operation button 24 is not pressed, Proceeding to step S2810, the process waits until a predetermined time elapses, and after the predetermined time elapses, ends the second and subsequent button effects XA without executing the effect mode XA2 (step S2812).

  In step S2809, when it is determined that the button press flag is stored (S2809: YES), that is, when the first button effect XA is executed and the effect operation button 24 is pressed, The process proceeds to step S2811 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed in the button effect XA currently being executed.

  If it is determined in step S2811 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2811: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2812, and the effect XA2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means. Is performed, the second and subsequent button effects XA are terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2811 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2811: NO), the process advances to step S2813 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2813: NO), the process returns to step S2811 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S2813, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2813: YES), that is, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S2812, and the symbol display as effect execution means is performed. After the device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 execute the effect mode XA2, the second and subsequent button effects XA are ended.

  According to the above process, the button effect XA can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XA may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 2 of a notice of feeling already using the button effect>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a flow in a case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XB as the effect element for the already-viewed notice and executes the button effect XB twice. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the effect modes XB1, XB2, XB3, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XB.

  When starting the execution of the first button effect XB, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XB1 including the content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player (S2901). In the example illustrated in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and a character and an image for urging the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, presentation mode XB1 may be another mode.

  After the performance mode XB1 is executed, if the performance operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2902: YES), the performance mode XB1 and the performance mode XB1 are pressed in response to the press of the performance operation button 24. Executes a different effect mode XB2 (S2903). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears in a treasure chest. However, effect mode XB2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2902: NO), the effect mode XB3 different from the effect mode XB1 and the effect mode XB2 is executed upon elapse of the predetermined time (S2907). . In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB3 is an effect mode in which a fish character carries away a treasure chest. However, effect mode XB3 may be another mode.

  When the execution of the second button effect XB is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XB1 as in the case of the first button effect XB (S2904 or S2908). Then, when the effect mode XB2 was executed when the first button effect XB was executed, after the effect mode XB1 was executed (S2904), there were and no cases where the effect operation button 24 was pressed. In any case (S2905), the effect XB2 is executed (S2906). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2905: YES), the effect mode XB2 is executed with the effect of the effect operation button 24 being pressed ( S2906). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2905: NO), the effect mode XB2 is executed upon the lapse of the predetermined time (S2906).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode XB3 was executed when the first button effect XB was executed, after the effect mode XB1 was executed (S2908), there were and no cases where the effect operation button 24 was pressed. In any case (S2909), the effect XB3 is executed (S2910). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S2909: YES), the effect mode XB3 is executed with the effect of the effect operation button 24 being pressed ( S2910). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2909: NO), the effect mode XB3 is executed upon the lapse of the predetermined time (S2910).

  When the second button effect XB ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S2911). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to a player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes another effect such as the above-described battle effect.

  When the button effect XB is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XB is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestive effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XB. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of presses, etc.). May be done. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the button effect XB a plurality of times as an effect element for the already-notified notice, if the effect mode XB2 is executed in the first button effect XB, the input by the player is performed. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB, and when the effect mode XB3 is executed in the first button effect XB, the operation mode of the input operation by the player Regardless of this, the effect mode XB3 is executed in the second and subsequent button effect XB. Therefore, even when the button effect XB is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XB to be executed for the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being seen (dejab) that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to perform the same operation. The player can be convinced that the content button effect XB is executed a plurality of times with special significance. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the staging operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the staging mode XB2 or Since the effect mode XB3 is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XB, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the staging operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the staging mode XB2 or the staging is triggered by the lapse of the predetermined time. Aspect XB3 can be implemented. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XB2 or the production mode XB3 is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the game can be increased. Improvement can be achieved. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XB2 or the effect mode XB3 at a predetermined timing without pressing the effect operation button 24 or elapse of a predetermined time.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XB as the effect element for the already-notified notice when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, and executes the button effect XB multiple times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time in which the press of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that each of the button effects performed a plurality of times has pressed the staging operation button 24 at different timings, and the button effect has the same content. Is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not easily feel that the button effect has been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-visited notice, so that the player does not easily feel the already-visited feeling. Can be suppressed. However, when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the already-notified notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, A configuration for displaying parameters may be used.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating a perceived notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and determines whether or not the perceived notice is generated. If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the button effect XB that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and performs a button effect in one game round related to the hold information. XB may be executed a plurality of times.

  The pachinko machine 10 may include a change unit that changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when there is a press (that is, a mode that is depressed by pressing). Then, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed (S2905: NO), and when the effect mode XB2 is executed (S2906), the changing means presses the effect operation button 24. It is good to change to the mode in the case. If such a change means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game, and even if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed, the effect mode XB2 is changed. Being executed can be persuasive. The changing means can be realized by, for example, providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB is performed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. .

  Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation accepting means, a stick or lever operated by the player to move forward and backward or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, and the like may be employed. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XB will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when a button effect XB is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for a noticed feeling notice. In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the first-time execution flag is stored in the sound-light-side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S3001 that the first execution completed flag is not stored (S3001: NO), that is, if the button effect XB has not been executed even once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S3002 to cause the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XB1 described above. The effect mode XB1 includes a content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3003 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, where the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means are described above. The production mode XB2 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3005, and the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S3003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3003: NO), the flow advances to step S3006 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3006: NO), the process returns to step S3003, and determines whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S3006, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3006: YES), that is, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3007, and the symbol display as effect execution means is performed. The apparatus 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 execute the above-described effect mode XB3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3008.

  In step S3008, after the first execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light RAM 94, the first button effect XB is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3001 that the first execution completed flag is stored (S3001: YES), that is, if the button effect XB has already been executed at least once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S3009, and causes the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XB1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3010.

  In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3010: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3010: NO), the process advances to step S3011 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3011: NO), the flow returns to step S3010, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3011: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3012.

  In step S3012, it is determined whether the button press flag is stored. If it is determined in step S3012 that the button press flag is stored (S3012: YES), the flow advances to step S3013 to display the effect XB2 on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means. After the execution, the second and subsequent button effects XB are ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3012 that the button press flag is not stored (S3012: NO), the process proceeds to step S3014, in which the effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means. After executing XB3, the second and subsequent button effects XB are terminated.

  According to the above process, the button effect XB can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XB may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 3 of notice of feeling already using button production>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a flow in a case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XC as the effect element for the already-viewed notice and executes the button effect XC twice. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XC1 and XC2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XC.

  When starting the execution of the first button effect XC, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an effect mode XC1 including a content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player (S3101). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and a character and an image for urging the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, presentation mode XC1 may be another mode.

  After the effect XC1, the effect XC2 different from the effect XC1 is executed regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3102). . Specifically, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3102: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed with the effect of the effect operation button 24 being pressed ( S3103). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears in a treasure chest. However, effect mode XC2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3102: NO), the effect mode XC2 is executed upon the lapse of the predetermined time (S3103).

  When the execution of the second button effect XC is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XC1 as in the case of the first button effect XC (S3104). After the effect XC1 is executed, the effect XC2 is executed (S3106) regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3105). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3105: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed with the effect of the effect operation button 24 being pressed ( S3106). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3105: NO), the effect mode XC2 is executed upon the lapse of the predetermined time (S3106).

  When the second button effect XC ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3107). In the example illustrated in FIG. 52, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to a player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes another effect such as the above-described battle effect.

  When the button effect XC is executed three or more times, the same control as that performed when the first and second button effects XC are executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is performed after the end of the last button effect XC. Just execute it.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of presses, etc.). May be done. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs the button operation XC for the first time and the button effect XC for the second and subsequent times. Irrespective of the operation mode, the effect mode XC2 is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XC is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XC to be executed for the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being seen (dejab) that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to perform the same operation. It is possible to convince the player that the content button effect XC has been executed a plurality of times with special significance. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed by the player within a predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XC, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. can do. Further, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is executed, so that the game can be provided with unexpectedness and the interest of the game can be improved. Can be. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XC2 at a predetermined timing without pressing the effect operation button 24 or elapse of a predetermined time.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the first button effect XC, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is forcibly executed. For this reason, the player who knows this mechanism expects that at the time when the first button effect XC is executed, the effect mode XC2 is forcibly executed without depressing the effect operation button 24. Will do. In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the button effect XA and the button effect XB in addition to the button effect XC, it is assumed that the effect mode XC2 is not forcibly executed in the first button effect. Even if there is, the player recognizes and suggests that the button effect being executed this time is not the button effect XC but the possibility of the above-described button effect XA or the possibility of the button effect XB is left. It is expected that the effect F will be executed. Therefore, the player can play a game with expectation for the second and subsequent button effects.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XC as the effect element for the already-notified notice when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, and performs the button effect XC multiple times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time in which the press of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that each of the button effects performed a plurality of times has pressed the staging operation button 24 at different timings, and the button effect has the same content. Is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not easily feel that the button effect has been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-visited notice, so that the player does not easily feel the already-visited feeling. Can be suppressed. However, when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the already-notified notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, A configuration for displaying parameters may be used.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating a perceived notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and determines whether or not the perceived notice is generated. When it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the button effect XC, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, before the hold information determined that the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice has been satisfied is targeted for the jackpot lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and performs a button effect in one game round related to the hold information. XC may be executed a plurality of times.

  The pachinko machine 10 may include a change unit that changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when there is a press (that is, a mode that is depressed by pressing). Then, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed (S3105: NO), and when the effect mode XC2 is executed (S3106), the changing unit presses the effect operation button 24. It is good to change to the mode in the case. If such a change means is provided, the mode of the production operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game, and even though the production operation button 24 is not pressed, the production mode XC2 is changed. Being executed can be persuasive. The changing means can be realized by, for example, providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC is performed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC may be performed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. .

  Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation accepting means, a stick or lever operated by the player to move forward and backward or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, and the like may be employed. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XC will be described.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when the button effect XC is executed as an effect element (advance effect) for the already-notified notice. In this button effect XC, the same processing is executed when executed for the first time and when executed for the second and subsequent times.

  In step S3201, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means execute the effect XC1 described above. The effect mode XC1 includes a content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3202.

  In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3202 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3202: YES), the process proceeds to step S3204, where the effect described above is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means. After executing the mode XC2, the button effect XC ends.

  If it is determined in step S3202 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3202: NO), the flow advances to step S3203 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3203: NO), the process returns to step S3202, and determines whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3203: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the flow proceeds to step S3204, and the effect execution means After causing the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XC2, the button effect XC ends.

  According to the above process, the button effect XC can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XC may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 4 of notice of feeling already using button production>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a flow in a case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the already-viewed notice and executes the button effect XD twice. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XD1, the effect mode XD2, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XD.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XD, first, the pachinko machine 10 includes a content suggesting that the effect operation button 24 is pressed to the player, and one of the plurality of options. An effect selection screen XD1 for allowing the player to select an option is displayed (S3301). The effect selection screen XD1 is a selection screen that switches the selection state each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the effect selection screen XD1 shows that a female character appears in the middle of the screen, a plurality of turtle characters carrying shells appear in front of the female character, and the effect operation button 24 is pressed. Each time the turtle character moves to the left (S3302), a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen. In the present embodiment, since the pattern of each turtle character is the same, the state of the effect selection screen XD1 does not change before and after the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the effect selection screen XD1 may have another mode other than that shown in FIG. 55, and may have a different mode before and after the effect operation button is pressed.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XD2 corresponding to the selected option at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3303). In the example illustrated in FIG. 55, in the effect mode XD2, a turtle character in front of the female character is selected at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, a shell carried by the selected turtle character is opened, and a shell of the shell is opened. This is an effect mode in which pearls having predetermined characteristics appear from the inside. In the present embodiment, although the picture of each turtle character is the same, the characteristics of objects such as pearls appearing in the shell differ for each turtle character.

  When the execution of the second button effect XD is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the same effect selection screen XD1 as the effect selection screen XD1 displayed in the first button effect XD (S3304). Then, each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the turtle character is moved to the left (S3305), and at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, the same as the effect mode XD2 corresponding to the first selected option. Rendering mode XD2 is executed (S3306). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the turtle character in front of the female character is selected at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, the shell carried by the selected turtle character opens, and the first time from among the shells, An effect XD2 in which pearls having the same characteristics appear is executed.

  When the second button effect XD ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XD of the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3307). In the example illustrated in FIG. 55, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to a player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes another effect such as the above-described battle effect.

  When the button effect XD is executed three or more times, the same control as that when the second button effect XD is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XD. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of presses, etc.). May be done. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when executing the button effect XD a plurality of times as an effect element for the already-notified notice, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the button effect XD to be executed for the second time or later. , The same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first button effect XD is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XD executed for the first time, the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being seen (dejab) that the button effect XD of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to perform the same operation. The player can be convinced that the content button effect XD is executed a plurality of times with special significance. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect selection screen XD1 has the same mode before and after the selection state is switched, so that when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the effect of the same mode is performed. The same effect mode XD2 is executed from the selection screen XD1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the sense of sight given to the player.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XD as the effect element for the already-notified notice when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, and performs the button effect XD multiple times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time in which the press of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that each of the button effects performed a plurality of times has pressed the staging operation button 24 at different timings, and the button effect has the same content. Is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not easily feel that the button effect has been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-visited notice, so that the player does not easily feel the already-visited feeling. Can be suppressed. However, when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the already-notified notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, A configuration for displaying parameters may be used.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating a perceived notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and determines whether or not the perceived notice is generated. If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the button effect XD, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, before the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-notified notice has been determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and performs a button effect in one game round related to the hold information. The XD may be executed a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 such as the pressed time and the number of times satisfies a predetermined operation condition. .

  Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation accepting means, a stick or lever operated by the player to move forward and backward or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, and the like may be employed. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XD will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when the button effect XD is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for the already-viewed notice. In step S3401, it is determined whether the first-time execution flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94. If it is determined in step S3401 that the first execution completed flag is not stored (S3401: NO), that is, if the button effect XD has not been executed once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. In step S3402, the effect selection screen XD1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. The effect selection screen XD1 includes the content suggesting that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3403.

  In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3403 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404, where the effect selection screen XD1 in which the selected state has been switched is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the example shown in FIG. 55, on the effect selection screen XD1, a mode in which the turtle character moves to the left and a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen is displayed. After that, the process advances to step S3405 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3405: NO), the flow returns to step S3403, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3405: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3406, and the selected effect mode XD2 is transmitted to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. Let it run. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3407.

  In step S3407, the type information of effect mode XD2 executed in step S3406 is stored. After that, the process advances to step S3408 to store the first execution completion flag in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light-side RAM 94, and then ends the first button effect XD.

  If it is determined in step S3401 that the first-time execution flag is stored (S3401: YES), that is, if the button effect XD has already been executed at least once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S3409, displays the same effect selection screen XD1 as the first time on the symbol display device 41, and causes the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3410.

  In step S3410, it is determined whether or not effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3410 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3410: YES), the process proceeds to step S3411, and the effect selection screen XD1 in which the selected state has been switched is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3412 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3412: NO), the process returns to step S3410, and determines whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3412: YES), the flow advances to step S3413 to display the effect mode XD2 stored in step S3407 on the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and After the various lamps 47 are executed, the second and subsequent button effects XD are terminated.

  According to the above processing, the button effect XD can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XD may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 5 of notice of feeling already using the button effect>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a flow in a case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XE as the effect element for the already-viewed notice and executes the button effect XE twice. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XE1, the effect mode XE2, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XE.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the first button effect XE, the pachinko machine 10 includes a content suggesting that the effect operation button 24 is pressed to the player, and one effect from a plurality of effect modes. An effect selection screen XE1 for allowing the player to select an aspect is displayed (S3501). The effect selection screen XE1 is a selection screen in which the selection state of the effect mode switches over time. In the example shown in FIG. 58, the effect selection screen XE1 is a roulette-type selection screen that allows the selection cursor to move with the passage of time and select one of the four effect modes. In the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is so fast that the player cannot select the specific effect mode. The effect selection screen XE1 may be in another mode.

  Regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3502), one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes, and the selected effect mode is selected. The effect XE2 is executed (S3503). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3502: YES), the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and a plurality of effect modes are selected. One rendering mode is selected, and the selected rendering mode XE2 is executed (S3503). On the other hand, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3502: NO), a state in which one effect mode is selected from a plurality of effect modes triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. And the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the selected effect mode XE2 is a cut-in notice effect in which a turtle character is the main character. However, another effect mode may be selected as the effect mode, and each effect mode that can be selected may be another mode.

  When the execution of the second button effect XE starts, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the first effect selection screen XE1 displayed (S3504). Then, regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3505), the same effect state as the first effect state is selected, and the corresponding effect state is selected. The selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506). Specifically, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3505: YES), the effect selected for the first time is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. The same effect mode as the mode is selected, and the selected effect mode XE2 is executed. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3505: NO), the same effect mode as the first effect mode selected for the first time is selected when the predetermined time has elapsed. And the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506).

  When the second button effect XE ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3507). In the example illustrated in FIG. 58, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to a player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes another effect such as the above-described battle effect.

  When the button effect XE is executed three times or more, the same control as that performed when the second button effect XE is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XE. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of presses, etc.). May be done. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when executing the button effect XE multiple times as an effect element for the already-viewed notice, performs the button effect XE to be executed for the second time or later regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. , The same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first button effect XE is selected and executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XE to be executed for the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being seen (dejab) that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to perform the same operation. It is possible to convince the player that the content button effect XE has been executed a plurality of times with special significance. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XE as the effect element for the already-notified notice when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, and executes the button effect XE multiple times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time in which the press of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that each of the button effects performed a plurality of times has pressed the staging operation button 24 at different timings, and the button effect has the same content. May be executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to perceive a sense of sight for the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-visited notice, so that the player does not easily feel the already-visited feeling. Can be suppressed. However, when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the already-notified notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, A configuration for displaying parameters may be used.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is so fast that the player cannot select the specific effect mode. Therefore, even though the player aims to stop the selection cursor at an effect mode different from the effect mode selected at the first time, the same effect mode as the effect mode selected at the first time is forcibly selected. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort of the player who has been played.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating a perceived notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and determines whether or not the perceived notice is generated. If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the button effect XE, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, before the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and performs a button effect in one game round related to the hold information. XE may be executed a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE is performed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. .

  Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation accepting means, a stick or lever operated by the player to move forward and backward or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, and the like may be employed. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XE will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when the button effect XE is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for the already-viewed notice. In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the first-time execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light RAM 94. If it is determined in step S3601 that the first-time execution completed flag is not stored (S3601: NO), the process advances to step S3602 to display the above-described roulette-type effect selection screen XE1 on the symbol display device 41 and to display the speaker. 46 and the various lamps 47 execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. The effect selection screen XE1 includes a content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3603.

  In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3603: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, where the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and one effect is performed. An image indicating that the mode has been selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3606.

  If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3603: NO), the flow advances to step S3604 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3604: NO), the process returns to step S3603, and determines whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3604: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, where the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, and an image indicating that one effect mode has been selected. Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3606.

  In step S3606, the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3605 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3607.

  In step S3607, the type of the presentation mode XE2 executed in step S3606 is stored in the sound-light-side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3608.

  In step S3608, the first button effect XE is ended after the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S3601 that the first execution completed flag is stored (S3601: YES), that is, if the button effect XE has already been executed at least once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S3609, displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the first time on the symbol display device 41, and causes the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3610.

  In step S3610, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3610 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3610: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, which is the timing after the effect operation button 24 has been pressed and stored in step S3607. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the rendered effect mode XE2 is selected, and the image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3613.

  If it is determined in step S3610 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3610: NO), the flow advances to step S3611, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3611: NO), the flow returns to step S3610, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3611, that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3611: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3612, and the effect mode XE2 stored in step S3607 at the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed has been selected. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing, and an image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3613.

  In step S3613, the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3612 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means, and then the second and subsequent button effects XE are ended.

  According to the above process, the button effect XE can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XE may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 6 of prior notice notice using button effect>
FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a flow in a case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XF as the effect element for the already-viewed notice and executes the button effect XF twice. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the effects XF1 and XF2 and the contents of the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XF.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the first button effect XF, the content indicating the continuous hit of the effect operation button 24 to the player and the predetermined parameter are changed in a certain direction over time. An effect XF1 including the content that changes is executed (S3701). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect mode XF1 includes the content in which the crab character on the player side is attacked by the black ink from the octopus character on the enemy side and tries to endure the black ink attack. This is an effect mode in which the parameter indicating the physical strength of the character changes in a direction decreasing with the attack of the ink. Further, in the effect mode XF1, as an example of a message indicating to the player that the effect operation button 24 is to be repeatedly hit, characters such as "Please hit repeatedly and endure!" Are displayed. However, presentation mode XF1 may be another mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect mode XF1 is executed, the parameters decrease with the lapse of time (S3702). At this time, if the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit by the player, the pachinko machine 10 executes control to reduce the parameter decreasing speed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes control such that the greater the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 per unit time, the lower the parameter reduction speed. In this way, the player repeatedly hits the effect operation buttons 24 so as to increase the number of presses of the effect operation buttons 24 per unit time in an attempt to reduce the parameter decreasing speed. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the player tries to reduce the parameter decreasing speed by repeatedly hitting the staging operation button 24 so that the crab character can withstand the octopus attack. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XF2 after the parameters satisfy the predetermined parameter condition (S3704). Specifically, after the parameter is reduced to 0, the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3704). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect mode XF2 is an effect mode including a content in which the crab character on the player side cannot withstand the attack of the octopus character on the enemy side and loses. However, presentation mode XF2 may be another mode.

  When the execution of the second button effect XF is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the same control as that of the first button effect XF. Specifically, the effect mode XF1 is executed (S3705), the parameter is decreased with the lapse of time (S3706), and after the parameter becomes 0 (S3707), the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3708). That is, the effect mode XF1 and the effect mode XF2 are executed regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24.

  When the second button effect XF ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3709). In the example illustrated in FIG. 61, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe, dejab !?” to a player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes another effect such as the above-described battle effect.

  When the button effect XF is executed three or more times, the same control as that when the second button effect XF is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestive effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XF. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of presses, etc.). May be done. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment similarly performs the button effect XF for the first time and the button effect XF for the second and subsequent times. Regardless of the operation mode, the parameter is reduced to 0, and the effect mode XF2 is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XF is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XF to be executed the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being viewed (dejab) that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to perform the same operation. The player can be convinced that the execution of the button effect XF of the content a plurality of times has a special meaning. In particular, when an effect mode (for example, an effect mode in which the character on the player's side is defeated) is executed as the effect mode XF2, a suggestive effect is executed from a depressed feeling. The expectation of can be raised at a stretch. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating a perceived notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and determines whether or not the perceived notice is generated. If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the button effect XF, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the already-viewed notice has been satisfied is determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and performs a button effect in one game round related to the hold information. The XF may be executed a plurality of times.

  The pachinko machine 10 stores the process of changing the parameter when executing the first button effect XF, and stores the process of changing the stored parameter when executing the second and subsequent button effect XF. May be reproduced. In this way, in each of the button effects XF executed a plurality of times, the process of changing the parameter becomes the same, so that the player can be provided with a stronger sense of sight.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 may include a change unit that changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when there is a press (that is, a mode that is recessed by pressing). Then, when executing the first button effect XF, the pachinko machine 10 stores the process of changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 when the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit by the player, and stores the second and subsequent times. When executing the button effect XF, the changing process of the mode of the stored effect operation buttons 24 may be reproduced by the changing means. In this way, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that the game can be given an unexpectedness. Furthermore, in the second and subsequent button effects XF, the process of changing the mode of the effect operation buttons 24 in the first button effect XF is reproduced, so that a stronger sense of view can be given to the player.

  Further, in the above example, an example in which the parameter is changed in a direction of decreasing with time has been described, but the parameter may be changed in a direction of increasing with time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the control such that the parameter increase speed increases as the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 per unit time increases. Examples of the parameter that increases with the passage of time include an attack power parameter and a power parameter of the character on the player side. Then, after the parameter increases and reaches a predetermined value such as a maximum value, a positive effect mode such as a winning effect may be executed. In this manner, similarly to the above example, the parameter increases to the predetermined maximum value regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the staging operation button 24 by the player, so that the pachinko machine 10 sets the button staging XF to It can be executed multiple times with the same contents. In addition, in order to increase the increasing speed of the parameter, the player repeatedly hits the effect operation button 24 so that the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 per unit time increases. Therefore, similarly to the above example, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the above example, the parameter is in the form of a bar, but is not limited thereto, and may be in the form of another shape such as a circle, and may be represented only by numerical values. It may be an aspect which was done.

  Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation accepting means, a stick or lever operated by the player to move forward and backward or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, and the like may be employed. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XF will be described.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when a button effect XF is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for a noticed feeling notice. In this button effect XF, the same processing is executed when executed for the first time and when executed for the second and subsequent times.

  In step S3801, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means execute the effect XF1 described above. The effect mode XF1 includes a content indicating to the player that the user repeatedly hits the effect operation button 24, and a content in which the physical strength parameter changes in a direction to decrease over time. After executing Step S3801, the process proceeds to Step S3802.

  In step S3802, it is determined whether or not effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit. Specifically, for example, the number of times the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time is counted, and if the number of presses is equal to or more than the predetermined number, it is determined that the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit. If it is determined in step S3802 that the staging operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit (S3802: YES), the flow advances to step S3803 to decrease the physical strength parameter at a predetermined speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3805.

  If it is determined in step S3802 that the staging operation button 24 has not been repeatedly hit (S3802: NO), the flow proceeds to step S3804, and the physical strength parameter is decreased at a speed higher than the predetermined speed in step S3803. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3805.

  In step S3805, it is determined whether the physical strength parameter has become 0. If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter is not 0 (S3805: NO), the flow returns to step S3802, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit. That is, the presence / absence of continuous hit of the staging operation button 24 is monitored until the physical strength parameter becomes 0, and during the period in which the staging operation button 24 is continuously hit, the physical strength parameter is reduced at a slow speed, and the staging operation button 24 is not hit continuously. The duration reduces the fitness parameters at a fast rate.

  If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter has become 0 (S3805: YES), the flow advances to step S3806 to display the above-described effect XF2 on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means. Let it run. After that, the first or second or later notice effect for notice of already-viewed feeling is ended.

  In the above example, the speed at which the physical strength value is reduced is described as two levels according to the presence or absence of continuous hits, but may be three levels or more according to the number of times the production operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time. Good.

  According to the above processing, the button effect XF can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XF may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 7 of prior feeling notice using button effect>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a flow in a case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XG as the effect element for the already-viewed notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the effect modes XG1 and XG2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XG.

  When starting the execution of the first button effect XG, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XG1 including the content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player (S3901). In the example illustrated in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and a character and an image for urging the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, presentation mode XA1 may be another mode.

  After the effect XG1 is executed, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3902: YES), the effect state XG1 and the effect mode XG1 are triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Executes a different effect mode XG2 (S3903). In the example shown in FIG. 64, effect mode XG2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, effect mode XG2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3902: NO), the effect mode XG2 is not executed while the effect mode XG1 is executed.

  When the execution of the second button effect XG is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XG1 as in the case of the first button effect XG (S3904 or S3908). If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XG1, (S3905: YES or S3909: YES) is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. As a result, the effect XG2 is executed (S3906 or S3910). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3905: NO or S3909: NO), the effect mode XG2 is not executed while the effect mode XG1 is executed.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 performs the effect mode XG2 in all of the button effects XG executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example) or the effect mode in all of the button effects XG executed multiple times. If XG2 has not been executed even once, a suggestion effect F indicating to the player that the button effect XG has been executed a plurality of times with the same content is executed (S3907 or S3911). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to a player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes another effect such as the above-described battle effect. On the other hand, when the button effect XG executed a plurality of times is not executed with the same content even once, specifically, even though the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG, the second time In the case where the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the button effect XG, and the effect mode XG2 is executed in the second button effect XG even though the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG. In this case, the suggestion effect F is not executed, and a normal reach effect or the like is executed.

  When the button effect XG is executed three or more times, the same control as that performed when the second button effect XG is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XG. It is only necessary to determine whether or not.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, the button effect XG will be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same (Dejab) that the button effect XG having the content of (1) has been executed a plurality of times can be given to the player. Further, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player is made aware that the button effect XG having the same content is executed a plurality of times. And the player can be convinced that the execution of the button effect XG having the same content a plurality of times has a special meaning.

  Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect F after the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects the suggestion effect F to be executed, and every time the button effect XG is executed, By performing the same input operation and operating the effect operation button 24 so that the button effect XG is executed with the same contents, the occurrence of the suggested effect F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the sequentially performed button effect XG can be appropriately increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XG2 is changed to the effect of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XG, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XG2 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XG as the effect element for the already-notified notice when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, and performs the button effect XG multiple times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time in which the press of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that each of the button effects performed a plurality of times has pressed the staging operation button 24 at different timings, and the button effect has the same content. Is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not easily feel that the button effect has been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-visited notice, so that the player does not easily feel the already-visited feeling. Can be suppressed. However, when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the already-notified notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, A configuration for displaying parameters may be used.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating a perceived notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and determines whether or not the perceived notice is generated. If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the button effect XG, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, before the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for occurrence of the perceived notice notice to be the target of the jackpot lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and performs a button effect in one game round related to the hold information. XG may be executed a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG may be performed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. .

  Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation accepting means, a stick or lever operated by the player to move forward and backward or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, and the like may be employed. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XG will be described.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when a button effect XG is executed as an effect element (advance effect) for a feeling-of-view notice. In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the first-time execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that the first execution completed flag is not stored (S4001: NO), that is, if the button effect XG has not been executed even once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S4002, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means execute the effect mode XG1 described above. The effect mode XG1 includes a content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4003.

  In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4003: YES), the process proceeds to step S4004, where the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect effecting means are described above. The effect mode XG2 is executed. After executing step S4004, the process proceeds to step S4005, and the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94. The button pressing flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XG is executed. After executing Step S4005, the process proceeds to Step S4007.

  If it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4003: NO), the flow advances to step S4006 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4006: NO), the flow returns to step S4003, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S4006, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4006: YES), that is, when the staging operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, step S4004 and step S4005 are not performed and step S4004 and step S4005 are not performed. The process proceeds to S4007.

  In step S4007, the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step S4008 to store the suggested effect execution flag in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94, and ends the first button effect XG.

  When the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the previously-presented notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effects XG. Alternatively, it is a flag for the sound light side MPU 92 to specify that the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effects XG.

  As described in the processing of each of the following steps, the suggested effect execution flag is set such that the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG after the stored feeling notice flag is stored, and the second and subsequent times. If the effect mode XG2 has not been executed even once in the button effect XG, it is deleted. In addition, when the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG after the stored feeling notice flag is stored, even if the effect mode XG2 is executed once in the second and subsequent button effects XG, the suggested effect execution flag is stored. It is erased when XG2 is executed. That is, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the already-viewed notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effects XG, or the plurality of button effects XG are executed. If the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all of the button effects XG, the suggested effect execution flag remains stored without being erased. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the announcement effect of the game times related to the hold information determined that the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice has been satisfied, it is determined whether the suggested effect execution flag is stored. Then, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the above-described suggestion effect F is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the normal effect effect or the like is executed without executing the suggestion effect F. Hereinafter, the description returns to the processing of each step in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that the first execution completed flag is stored (S4001: YES), that is, if the button effect XG has already been executed at least once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S4009, and causes the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XG1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4010.

  In step S4010, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4010: YES), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the effect mode XG2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means. Is executed. After that, the process advances to step S4012 to determine whether or not the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4012 that the button press flag is stored (S4012: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended without deleting the suggested effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4012 that the button press flag is not stored (S4012: NO), the process proceeds to step S4015.

  In step S4015, if the suggested effect execution flag is stored, the suggested effect execution flag is deleted, and the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended. If the suggested effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effects XG are terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4010: NO), the process advances to step S4013 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4013: NO), the process returns to step S4010 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4013: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4014.

  In step S4014, it is determined whether the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4014 that the button press flag is stored (S4014: YES), the process proceeds to step S4015, and if the suggested effect execution flag is stored, the suggested effect execution flag is deleted. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4014 that the button press flag is not stored (S4014: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended without erasing the suggested effect execution flag.

  According to the above process, the suggestion effect F can be executed only when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XG may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 8 of notice of feeling already using button production>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating a flow in a case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XH as the effect element for the already-viewed notice and executes the button effect XH twice. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the effect modes XH1, XH2, XH3, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XH.

  When the execution of the first button effect XH is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XH1 including the content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player (S4101). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and a character and an image for urging the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, effect mode XH1 may be another mode.

  If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XH1 (S4102: YES), the effect mode XH1 and the effect mode XH1 will be triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Executes a different effect mode XH2 (S4103). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, effect mode XH2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S4102: NO), the effect XH3, which is different from the effect XH1 and the effect XH2, is executed upon elapse of the predetermined time (S4109). . In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH3 is an effect mode in which a fish character carries away a treasure chest. However, effect mode XH3 may be another mode.

  When the execution of the second button effect XH is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XH1 as in the case of the first button effect XH (S4104 or S4110). Then, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XH1, (S4105: YES or S4111: YES) is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. And the effect mode XH2 is executed (S4106 or S4112). On the other hand, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S4105: NO or S4111: NO), the effect mode XH3 is executed upon elapse of the predetermined time (S4107).

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 performs the effect mode XH2 in all of the button effects XH executed a plurality of times (in the above example, twice), or the effect mode in all of the button effects XH executed multiple times. When XH3 has been executed, a suggestion effect F indicating to the player that the button effect XH has been executed a plurality of times with the same content is executed (S4108 or S4114). In the example illustrated in FIG. 67, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes another effect such as the above-described battle effect. On the other hand, when the button effect XH executed a plurality of times is not executed with the same content even once, specifically, even though the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH, the second time In the case where the effect XH3 is executed in the button effect XH, and the effect XH2 is executed in the second button effect XH despite the effect XH3 being executed in the first button effect XH. Does not execute the suggestion effect F, but executes a normal reach effect or the like.

  When the button effect XH is executed three or more times, the same control as that when the second button effect XH is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XH. It is only necessary to determine whether or not.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, the button effect XH will be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same Can be given to the player as if the button effect XH having the content of (1) was executed a plurality of times. Further, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player is made aware that the button effect XH having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. And the player can be convinced that the execution of the button effect XH having the same content a plurality of times has a special meaning.

  Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect F after the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects the suggestion effect F to be executed, and every time the button effect XH is executed, By performing the same input operation and operating the effect operation button 24 so that the button effect XH is executed with the same contents, the occurrence of the suggested effect F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the sequentially performed button effect XH can be appropriately increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed by the player within a predetermined time, the effect mode XH2 is changed by the pressing of the effect operation button 24 as a trigger. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XH, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XH2 at a predetermined timing without pressing the effect operation button 24.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XH as the effect element for the already-notified notice when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, and performs the button effect XH multiple times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time in which the press of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that each of the button effects performed a plurality of times has pressed the staging operation button 24 at different timings, and the button effect has the same content. Is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not easily feel that the button effect has been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-visited notice, so that the player does not easily feel the already-visited feeling. Can be suppressed. However, when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the already-notified notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the already-notified notice is satisfied, A configuration for displaying parameters may be used.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating a perceived notice is satisfied before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and determines whether or not the perceived notice is generated. If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the button effect XH, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, before the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for occurrence of the already-viewed notice has been determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for occurrence of the already-visited notice is satisfied when the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery, and performs a button effect in one game round related to the hold information. XH may be executed a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH is performed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. .

  Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation accepting means, a stick or lever operated by the player to move forward and backward or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, and the like may be employed. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XH will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when the button effect XH is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for a noticed feeling notice. In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the first-time execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that the first execution completed flag is not stored (S4201: NO), that is, if the button effect XH has not been executed even once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S4202, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are caused to execute the effect mode XH1 described above. The effect mode XH1 includes a content indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed for the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4203.

  In step S4203, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4203 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means are described above. The effect mode XH2 is executed. After executing step S4204, the process advances to step S4205 to store the button press flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94. The button pressing flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XH is executed. After executing Step S4205, the process proceeds to Step S4207.

  If it is determined in step S4203 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4203: NO), the flow advances to step S4206 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4206: NO), the flow returns to step S4203, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4206: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4207, and a symbol display as effect execution means is performed. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 execute the above-described effect mode XH3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4208.

  In step S4208, the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step S4209 to store the suggested effect execution flag in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94, and ends the first button effect XH.

  When the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the already-presented notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effects XH. Alternatively, it is a flag for the sound light side MPU 92 to specify that the effect mode XH2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effects XH.

  As described in the processing of each of the following steps, the suggested effect execution flag is set such that when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH after the sighted notice flag is stored, the suggested effect execution flag is set for the second and subsequent times. If the effect mode XH3 is executed even once in the button effect XH, it is deleted. In addition, when the presentation effect execution flag is stored in the first button effect XH and the effect mode XH3 is executed after the stored feeling notice flag is stored, the effect mode XH2 is performed at least once in the second and subsequent button effects XH. Is erased when is executed. That is, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the already-viewed notice flag is stored, when the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all the button effects XH, or when the button effect XH is executed When the same effect mode XH3 is executed in all of the button effects XH, the suggested effect execution flag remains stored without being erased. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the announcement effect of the game times related to the hold information determined that the occurrence condition of the already-viewed notice has been satisfied, it is determined whether the suggested effect execution flag is stored. Then, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the above-described suggestion effect F is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the normal effect effect or the like is executed without executing the suggestion effect F. Hereinafter, the description returns to the processing of each step in FIG.

  In step S4201, when it is determined that the first execution completion flag is stored (S4201: YES), that is, when the button effect XH has already been executed at least once after the already-viewed notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S4210, and causes the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XH1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4211.

  In step S4211, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4211 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4211: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4212, and the effect mode XH2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means. Is executed. After that, the process advances to step S4213 to determine whether or not the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4213 that the button press flag is stored (S4213: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended without deleting the suggested effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4213 that the button press flag is not stored (S4213: NO), the process advances to step S4217.

  In step S4217, if the suggested effect execution flag is stored, the suggested effect execution flag is deleted, and the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended. If the suggested effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effects XH are terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4211 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4211: NO), the process advances to step S4214 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4214: NO), the flow returns to step S4211, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4214: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4215, and the symbol display as the effect executing means is performed. The effect mode XH3 is executed by the device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4216.

  In step S4216, it is determined whether or not the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4216 that the button press flag is stored (S4216: YES), the process proceeds to step S4217 described above, and if the suggested effect execution flag is stored, the suggested effect execution flag is deleted. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4216 that the button press flag is not stored (S4216: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended without deleting the suggested effect execution flag.

  According to the above processing, the suggestion effect F can be executed only when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XH may be realized by another algorithm.

  According to the present embodiment described above, various expectations can be given to the player. In particular, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to select at least two or more of the above-described button effects XA, XB, XC, XG, and XH as effect elements for the already-visited notice, the player needs the button effect. While paying attention to the effect mode executed in the effect, various predictions are made as to which type of button effect is being executed, and the generation of a suggested effect is expected. Therefore, the interest in the game can be further improved.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. The main difference between the present embodiment and the first to seventh embodiments is that a second starting port unit 200 including a second starting port is provided in the right area of the game area GA. The point is that a type of high frequency support mode is set. In the following description, the configuration of the second starting port unit 200 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control related to the second starting port unit 200 will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as those in the first to seventh embodiments will be omitted.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the second starting port unit 200 including the second starting port is provided in the right area of the game area GA. In the present embodiment, all game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 with a predetermined or higher firing intensity enter the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the second starting port unit 200. The second starting port unit 200 includes an opening 202 into which a game ball can enter, a route R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 202, and a route R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 202. An alternate distribution mechanism 204 is provided for alternately distributing a game ball entering the opening 202 into a left path R1 and a right path R2. Downstream of the route R1, a through gate 206 through which game balls can pass is provided, and downstream of the throughgate 206 and the route R2, an opening and closing ball device 208 is provided.

  The alternate distribution mechanism 204 is configured to distribute game balls that have entered the opening 202 to the route R1, and to distribute game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the route R1 to the route R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 includes a central piece 204a formed in the center, a left piece 204b formed on the left side of the central piece 204a, and a right piece formed on the right side of the central piece 204a. It has a piece 204c and a rotating shaft 204d provided between the left piece 204b and the right piece 204c. An area sandwiched between the central piece 204a and the left piece 204b functions as a left holding section 204e for temporarily holding a game ball. In addition, an area sandwiched between the central piece 204a and the right piece 204c functions as a right holding unit 204f for temporarily holding a game ball. The behavior of the alternate sorting mechanism 204 when the game ball reaches the alternate sorting mechanism 204 will be described later.

  The opening and closing ball input device 208 includes an opening and closing door 208b as an electric accessory that opens and closes forward and backward with respect to a lower rotation axis as a base point, and a second starting port 208a through which a game ball can enter is provided inside the opening and closing door 208b. Have. In addition, a guide path 208c that is inclined toward the second starting port 208a is provided inside the opening / closing door 208b, and a game ball that enters the inside of the opening / closing door 208b passes through the second path along the guiding path 208c. It is guided to the starting port 208a. The second starting port 208a has the same role as the second starting port 34 in the above embodiment. When the opening / closing door 208b is in the closed state, it is in a state in which game balls cannot enter the second starting port 208a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, it is in a state where game balls can enter the second starting port 208a. That is, the opening / closing door 208b has a function of shifting the state of the second start port 208a between a ball entry impossible state and a ball entry possible state. Note that, in normal times, the opening / closing door 208b is in a closed state, and the second starting port 208a is in a ball-inhibited state.

  The through gate 206 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When a game ball passes through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 determines whether or not the above-mentioned opening / closing door 208b is to be changed to an open state when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 (the electric lottery). Object release lottery). As a result of the electric-power-operated-object opening lottery, when winning is made to shift the opening / closing door 208b to the open state, the main controller 60 causes the general-purpose unit 38 to display the result of the electric-powered accessory opening lottery and closes the opening / closing door 208b. Transition from the state to the open state.

  The route R <b> 1 is configured such that the distributed game balls can pass through the through gate 206, and the distributed game balls are in a state where the opening / closing door 208 b of the opening / closing ball input device 208 is open. In this case, it is configured to be able to enter the second starting port 208a. In the present embodiment, a route R1x branched from the route R1 is provided, but the game balls distributed to the route R1 are configured to always pass through the through gate 206. However, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball distributed to the route R1 does not pass through the through gate 206 but passes through the route R1x.

  The route R2 is configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the through gate 206, and the sorted game balls are placed in a state where the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball input device 208 is open. In some cases, it is configured to be able to enter the second starting port 208a.

  In the present embodiment, after the game ball passes through the through gate 206, the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 is displayed by the general figure unit 38. (I.e., the fluctuation time from when the light-emitting display unit of the general-purpose unit 38 starts the fluctuation display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the motorized character opening lottery) is performed, the game ball is set to the through gate. The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening and closing ball input device 208. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds. Is set to 0.05 seconds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general-purpose unit 38 to when the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 starts to transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening and closing door 208b closes immediately after the variation of the general-purpose unit 38 ends and the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general figure unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state will be started.

  However, strictly speaking, there is a time required for the control from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general-purpose unit 38 to when the opening / closing door 208b starts transition from the closed state to the open state. . In the present embodiment, the time required for the control from the time when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general-purpose unit 38 to the time when the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 starts transition from the closed state to the open state. Is about 0.004 seconds. As described above, the main control device 60 determines that the electric power support process (FIG. 12: S407, FIG. 76 described later) in the normal process (FIG. 12) is performed for 0.004 seconds as described above. In the case of winning the electric accessory opening lottery and displaying the winning result on the general-purpose unit 38 (S4520 in FIG. 76), the next tour executed in the 0.004 second cycle is repeated. This is because the opening process of the opening / closing door 208b (FIG. 77: S4698) is executed in the electric utility opening / closing process (FIG. 76: S4522, FIG. 77 described later) of the electric role supporting process (FIG. 76). That is, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the time required for control in addition to the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and the waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b, the opening / closing time of the game ball after passing through the through gate 206 is considered. The time required for the opening / closing door 208b of the ball device 208 to start transitioning from the closed state to the open state is from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening / closing ball device 208. The time is shorter than the time.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 and wins in the motorized accessory opening lottery, the main control device 60 causes the game ball, which triggered the execution of the motorized accessory opening lottery, to open and close. Prior to the timing of reaching the ball device 208, the open / close door 208b is changed from the closed state to the open state. As a result, when the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric auditors goods opening lottery wins the electric auditors goods opening lottery, the game ball enters the second starting port 208a provided inside the opening / closing door 208b. Will do.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode as types of the high frequency support mode for controlling the opening / closing door 208b. In the first high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric auditors goods opening lottery is set to 100%, and the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing door 208b when the election in the electric auditors goods opening lottery is one, and the opening time is 0. .5 seconds. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric auditors goods opening lottery is set to 100%, and the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing door 208b and the opening time in the case of winning in the electric auditors goods opening lottery are one. Set to 1 second. That is, the difference between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is the length of time that the open / close door 208b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball firing mechanism. 81, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a differs in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start-up opening unit 200 when the first high-frequency support mode is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the game ball has a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, and has a strength of 0.6. Fired consecutively at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals.

  As shown in the state A1, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 from the opening 202, it reaches the alternating distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternate sorting mechanism 204 is inclined rightward, the game ball that has reached the alternate sorting mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left holding unit 204e. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding section 204e, and becomes the state A2. .

  As shown in state A2, when the alternate sorting mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held in the left holding unit 204e falls from the left holding unit 204e and is distributed to the left route R1. . Thereafter, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric accessory opening lottery in the first high-frequency support mode is set to 100%. The opening / closing door 208b is set to open once and the opening time is set to 0.5 second. Further, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 for displaying the lottery result of the electric auditors product open lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is not provided, and after the winning result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed on the general drawing unit 38, the opening / closing entrance device 208 is opened. The time required for the control until the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition to the open state is about 0.004 seconds. Therefore, the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball input device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.06 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.5 seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds. At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208, the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. Thereafter, a game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202 and enters the state A3.

  As shown in the state A3, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is in a state of being inclined to the left, so that The game ball GB2 that has reached the distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held in the right holding section 204f, and becomes the state A4.

  As shown in the state A4, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined rightward, the game ball GB2 held in the right holding unit 204f falls from the right holding unit 204f and is distributed to the right route R2. . Thereafter, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208, and then the game ball GB2 is opened / closed. The interval until reaching the ball input device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 208b is already in the closed state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing / ball entry device 208, so that the game ball GB2 is opened / closed. The ball cannot enter the second starting port 208a provided inside the device 208. Thereafter, the state becomes the state A1 again, and the states A1 to A4 are repeated.

  That is, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game balls are continuously emitted at a predetermined firing intensity at which the game ball firing mechanism 81 can reach the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. In the situation where the game ball GB1 that has been distributed to the route R1 and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b is transitioned to the open state, and is distributed to the route R2. At the timing at which the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the closed state.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a behavior of the second start-up opening unit 200 when the second high-frequency support mode is being executed. The states A1 to A3 in FIG. 72 are the same as the states A1 to A3 in FIG. 71 described above. However, in the second high-frequency support mode, since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 1.1 seconds, as shown in the state A4 of FIG. 72, the gaming ball GB1 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1. At the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 is maintained in an open state, and the game ball GB2 is a second start port provided inside the opening / closing door 208b. 208a.

  That is, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game balls are continuously emitted at a predetermined firing intensity at which the game ball firing mechanism 81 can reach the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. In the situation where the game ball GB1 that has been distributed to the first route and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b is transitioned to the open state and the second state is fired. The opening / closing door 208b is kept open even at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the route of FIG.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 73 also shows the type of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and the contents thereof for reference. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set as types of the high-frequency support modes to be executed after the end of the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second starting port 208a is set to one.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 9, 8R The mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability-change jackpot, and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 25 to 29, the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability-change jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 208a is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, 8R The mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the process shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability-change jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R certain jackpot, and shifts to the second high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, the game ball is fired in a situation where the game ball is continuously fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of game balls is defined as the throwing rate, and the throwing rate when the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high-frequency support mode is executed is output. It is defined as the sphere Mi. Hereinafter, the pitching rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is executed and the pitching rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed will be described.

In the first high-frequency support mode, a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. As described above, as described above, one of the two game balls fired enters the second starting port 208a of the opening / closing ball input device 208, and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. Will be. Therefore, the pitching rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is being executed is as follows.
M1 = 1/2 = 0.50

  Here, that the throwing rate is less than 1 means that the game balls are continuously emitted at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity at which the game balls can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. Means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced in the situation where the game is being fired. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds, and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. , Every 1.2 seconds.

In the second high-frequency support mode, game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity at which the game ball firing mechanism 81 can reach the second starting port unit 200. As described above, of the two game balls fired, two game balls enter the second starting port 208a of the opening / closing ball input device 208, and the two game balls are paid out as prize balls. Will be. Accordingly, the pitching rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is being executed is as follows.
M2 = 2/2 = 1.00

  Here, the throwing rate of 1 means that the game ball is a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, and is continuously emitted at 0.6 second intervals. This means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease in the situation where the game is being fired. Therefore, in the second high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds and two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will not increase or decrease.

  Also, the ratio of the i-th high frequency support mode executed to the case where the high frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is defined as PAi. Then, the ratio PA1 in which the first high frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PA2 in which the second high frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1 = the number of jackpot type counters C2 (0 to 19) to be transferred to the first high-frequency support mode after winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 / the jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2 = 20/30
PA2 = number of jackpot type counters C2 (20 to 29) / number of jackpots to be won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and to shift to the second high frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 10/30

  Further, if the total ball-out rate in the case where the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the high-frequency support is executed is defined as the first overall ball-out rate T1, , The first overall pitch rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (1).

  In the above formula (1), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in the present embodiment, n = 2. Therefore, the first overall pitching rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2
= 0.50 x (20/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) = 0.67

  That is, the first overall pitching rate T1 is the sum of the pitching rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 multiplied by the execution rate, and It means the expected value of the sphere.

Also, the ratio of the i-th high-frequency support mode executed to the case where the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 208a is defined as PBi. I do. Then, the ratio PB1 at which the first high frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PB2 at which the second high frequency support mode is executed are as follows.
PB1 = the number of jackpot type counters C2 (0 to 11) to be transferred to the first high-frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 208a / the jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2 = 12/30
PB2 = the number of jackpot type counters C2 (12 to 29) / number of jackpots to be won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 208a and to shift to the second high frequency support mode. Total number of values of type counter C2 = 18/30

  Also, if the total ball-out rate in the case where the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a and the high-frequency support is executed is defined as a second total ball-out rate T2, , The second overall pitch rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (2).

  In the above equation (2), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in the present embodiment, n = 2. Therefore, the second overall pitching rate T2 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2
= 0.50 x (12/30) + 1.00 x (18/30) = 0.80

  In other words, the second overall pitching rate T2 is the sum of the pitching rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 208a multiplied by the execution rate, and It means the expected value of the sphere.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first overall pitch rate T1 and the value of the second overall pitch rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

  Next, an example of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processes different from those in the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processes will be omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a winning process for a start-up opening executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 10) executed by main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

  In step S4306, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. The processing in the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 10) executed by main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and therefore the description is omitted.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode, which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 19) executed by main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

  Main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the second high frequency support flag in step S4404. As a result, after ending the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability change jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state in which the second high-frequency support mode is set. The second high frequency support flag is used to determine whether the second high frequency support mode is being executed.

  Further, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the first high frequency support flag in step S4407. As a result, after ending the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state in which the first high-frequency support mode is set. The processing in the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 19) executed by main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and thus the description is omitted. The first high frequency support flag is used to determine whether the first high frequency support mode is being executed.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the electronic support process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 20) executed by main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

  In step S4509, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs an electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to 100%. Specifically, since the possible value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249, the winning of the electric accessory opening lottery is won. . Also, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the electric auditors goods lottery.

  In addition, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the support winning flag and sets “1” in the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 in step S4511. I do. This means that the number of opening times of the opening / closing door 208b in the case of winning the electric accessory opening lottery during the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment is one. The processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 20) executed by main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the electric opening / closing processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 21) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that a different opening time is set for each of the two types of high-frequency support modes. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  In step S4601, it is determined whether the opening / closing door 208b as the electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the opening / closing door 208b is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the door 208b is open (S4601: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4602.

  In step S4602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of opening of the door 208b. In step S4602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4602: NO), the electric-power combination opening / closing process ends as it is. That is, when the opening continuation time of the opening / closing door 208b has not ended, the present electric combination opening / closing processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4602: YES), the flow advances to step S4603 to perform a closing process for controlling the opening and closing door 208b to a closed state. "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the 2-timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening continuation time of the opening / closing door 208b is “0”, the opening / closing door 208b is closed, and this time the second timer counter area T2 is closed. Is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time, and "25" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step S4603, the process proceeds to Step S4604.

  In step S4604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S4605 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S4605: NO), the main electric switch opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S4605: YES), the process advances to step S4606 to clear the supporting flag. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that the door 208b is not being opened (S4601: NO), the process advances to step S4607 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the opening / closing door 208b. If it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S4607: NO), the electric-power-operated opening / closing processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4607: YES), the flow advances to step S4608 to execute an opening process for controlling the opening / closing door 208b to the open state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4609.

  In step S4609, it is determined whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the open / close execution mode (S4609: NO), the process proceeds to step S4610 to determine whether or not it is the first high-frequency support mode. Is determined.

  If it is determined in step S4610 that the current mode is the first high frequency support mode (S4610: YES), the flow advances to step S4611 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4610 that it is not in the first high-frequency support mode (S4610: NO), the flow advances to step S4612 to determine whether it is in the second high-frequency support mode.

  If it is determined in step S4612 that the current mode is the second high-frequency support mode (S4612: YES), the flow advances to step S4613 to set "550" (i.e., 1.1 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4609 that it is in the open / close execution mode (S4609: YES), or if it is determined in step S4612 that it is not in the second high-frequency support mode (S4612: NO), the process proceeds to step S4614. Then, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 can pass through the through gate 206 and the second when the open / close door 208b is open. It is possible to enter the starting port 208a. On the other hand, the game ball GB2 arriving after the game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R2, so that the game ball GB2 cannot pass through the through gate 206 and the second start port 208a when the opening / closing door 208b is open. It is possible to enter the ball. That is, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, only the game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 206, and each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second starting port 208a. Whether or not the opening / closing door 208b is open at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1, GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208 is determined. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is reduced while the number of game balls passing through the through gate 206 is one of the two game balls GB1 and GB2. It can be changed depending on the state of the door 208b.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the motor-driven accessory opening lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball GB1 through the through gate 206, and based on the result of the motor-operated object opening lottery. The door 208b is controlled. Since the game ball GB2 arriving after the game ball GB1 does not pass through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 controls the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing door 208b at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208. Whether the state is set to the closed state or the open state, that is, whether or not each of the game balls GB1 and GB2 is made to enter the second starting port 208a is triggered by the passage of the game ball GB1 through the through gate 206. It is determined according to the result of the electric bonus opening lottery executed and the type of the support mode. Therefore, the control as to whether or not each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second starting port 208a is controlled by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball GB1 through the through gate 206. It can be realized by.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time from when the light-emitting display unit of the general-purpose unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the motor-powered object opening lottery is performed is determined by the electric-powered property. The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 which has triggered the open lottery to pass through the through gate 206 to when the game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball input device 208. Therefore, the general figure unit 38 can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208. Here, the main controller 60 starts the control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the general-purpose unit 38. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing at which the ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball input device 208.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the light-emitting display unit of the general-purpose unit 38 starts changing display, the stop display corresponding to the winning result of the electric auditors character open lottery is performed, and the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball input device 208 is opened. During the time until the transition to the open state is started, after the first game ball GB1 which has triggered the opening of the electric accessory has passed through the through gate 206, the game ball GB1 is opened and closed. The time is set to be shorter than the time to reach 208. Therefore, main controller 60 can realize a high-frequency support mode in which opening / closing door 208b is open at the timing when game ball GB1 that has passed through through gate 206 reaches opening / closing ball input device 208.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 changes the length of time for which the open / close door 208b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state for each type of the high frequency support mode. Since the control is performed, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 can be made different for each type of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 allocated to the route R1 enters the second starting port 208a, and the game ball GB2 arriving after the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a. A first high-frequency support mode (ball pitch M1 = 0.50) and a second high-frequency support mode (ball pitch M2 = 1.00) in which both of the game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting port 208a. ) Is realized. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes having different throwing rates can be realized, so that it is possible to add inflection to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. This embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that the configuration of the second starting port unit is different and that three types of high-frequency support modes are set. In the following description, the configuration of the second starting port unit 300 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control related to the second starting port unit 300 will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as those in the first to eighth embodiments will be omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the second start-up port unit 300 provided in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. The second starting port unit 300 includes an opening 302 into which a game ball can enter, a route R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 302, and a route R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 302. There is provided a first alternate distribution mechanism 304 for alternately distributing game balls entering the opening 302 to the left route R1 and the right route R2. The second starting port unit 300 further includes a second alternating distribution mechanism 305 provided downstream of the path R1, a path R11 provided on the left side downstream of the second alternating distribution mechanism 305, and a second alternating vibration And a route R12 provided on the right side downstream of the minute mechanism 305. Downstream of the route R11, a through gate 306 through which a game ball can pass is provided, and downstream of the throughgate 306, the route R12, and the route R2, an opening / closing ball device 308 is provided.

  The first alternating distribution mechanism 304 is configured to distribute a game ball that has entered the opening 302 alternately to a left path R1 and a right path R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 304 includes a central piece 304a formed at the center, a left piece 304b formed to the left of the central piece 304a, and a right piece formed to the right of the central piece 304a. There is provided a piece 304c and a rotating shaft 304d provided between the left piece 304b and the right piece 304c. An area sandwiched between the central piece 304a and the left piece 304b functions as a left holding section 304e for temporarily holding a game ball. The region sandwiched between the central piece 304a and the right piece 304c functions as a right holding section 304f for temporarily holding a game ball. The behavior of the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 when the game ball arrives is the same as the behavior of the alternating distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

  The second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is configured to distribute the game balls distributed to the route R1 alternately to the left route R11 and the right route R12. Specifically, the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is formed at a center piece 305a formed at the center, a left piece 305b formed at the left of the center piece 305a, and formed at the right of the center piece 305a. And a rotating shaft 305d provided between the left piece 305b and the right piece 305c. An area sandwiched between the central piece 305a and the left piece 305b functions as a left holding section 305e for temporarily holding a game ball. The area sandwiched between the central piece 305a and the right piece 305c functions as a right holding section 305f for temporarily holding a game ball. The behavior of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 when the game ball arrives is the same as the behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

  The opening / closing ball entry device 308 includes an opening / closing door 308b that opens and closes forward and backward with a lower rotation axis as a base point, and a second starting port 308a into which a game ball can enter, provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. In addition, a guide path 308c that is inclined toward the second starting port 308a is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b, and a game ball that enters the inside of the opening / closing door 308b passes through a second path along the guiding path 308c. It is guided to the starting port 308a. The second starting port 308a has the same role as the second starting port 34 in the above embodiment. When the opening / closing door 308b is in the closed state, it is in a state where it is impossible for game balls to enter the second starting port 308a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing door 308b is in an open state, it is in a state where game balls can enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the opening / closing door 308b has a function of changing the state of the second starting port 308a between a ball entry impossible state and a ball entry possible state. Note that, at normal times, the opening / closing door 308b is in a closed state, and the second start port 308a is in a ball-inhibited state.

  The through gate 306 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When a game ball passes through the through gate 306, the main controller 60 determines whether or not the above-described opening / closing door 308b is to be changed to the open state by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 306. Object release lottery). As a result of the electric-power-operated goods opening lottery, when the winning of the opening / closing door 308b is changed to the open state, the main control device 60 causes the general-purpose unit 38 to display the result of the electric-powered goods opening lottery and closes the open / close door 308b. Transition from the state to the open state.

  The route R11 is configured such that the distributed game balls can pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls are in a state where the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball-in device 308 is open. In this case, it is configured to be able to enter the second starting port 308a. In the present embodiment, a route R11x branched from the route R11 is provided, but the game balls distributed to the route R11 are configured to always pass through the through gate 306. However, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls distributed to the route R11 do not pass through the through gate 306 but pass through the route R11x.

  The route R2 and the route R12 are configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the sorted game balls are placed on the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball input device 308. When it is in the open state, it is configured to be able to enter the second starting port 308a.

  In the present embodiment, after the game ball passes through the through gate 306, the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is displayed by the general figure unit 38. (I.e., the fluctuation time from when the light-emitting display unit of the general-purpose unit 38 starts the fluctuation display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the motorized character opening lottery) is performed, the game ball is set to the through gate. The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308 after passing through the ball 306. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 to when the game ball reaches the opening / closing and entering ball device 308 is about 0.2 seconds. Is set to 0.05 seconds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general-purpose unit 38 to when the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 starts to transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening and closing door 208b closes immediately after the variation of the general-purpose unit 38 ends and the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general figure unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state will be started.

  In this embodiment, similarly to the above-described eighth embodiment, after the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general-purpose unit 38, the opening and closing door 208b starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state. There is a time required for control of about 0.004 seconds before the game is performed. The time from when the ball passes through the through gate 306 to when the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball entry device 308 starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state is determined after the game ball passes through the through gate 306. The time is set to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the opening and closing ball input device 308.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the through gate 306 and wins in the motorized accessory opening lottery, the main control device 60 causes the game ball, which triggered the execution of the motorized accessory opening lottery, to open and close. Prior to the timing of reaching the ball device 308, the door 308b is changed from the closed state to the open state. As a result, when the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric auditors goods opening lottery wins the electric auditors goods opening lottery, it enters the second starting port 308a provided inside the opening and closing door 308b. Will do.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high-frequency support mode, a second high-frequency support mode, and a third high-frequency support mode as types of the high-frequency support modes for controlling the opening / closing door 308b. ing. In the first high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%. .5 seconds. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%. Set to 1 second. In the third high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the number of times the opening / closing door 308b is opened and the opening time are 1 in the case of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery. .7 seconds. That is, the difference between the first to third high-frequency support modes is the length of time that the open / close door 308b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing a trajectory of a game ball when the game ball enters the second starting port unit 300. In a case where the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 provided in the second starting port unit 300 is inclined rightward and the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is inclined rightward, the first one When the game ball GB1 enters the ball through the opening 302, the game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and is distributed to the path R11 by the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. As a result, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306 and enters the second starting port 308a provided inside the opening and closing door 308b if the opening and closing door 308b of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 is in the open state. Will be. That is, the trajectory of the game ball GB1 that has entered the first ball is the trajectory L1 shown in FIG.

  When the second game ball GB2 following the game ball GB1 enters through the opening 302, the game ball GB2 is distributed to the route R2 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB2 does not pass through the through gate 306 and reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 308. If the opening and closing door 308b of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 is in an open state, the game ball GB2 is provided inside the opening and closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the trajectory of the game ball GB2 that has entered the second ball becomes the trajectory L2 shown in FIG.

  When the third game ball GB3 following the game ball GB2 enters through the opening 302, the game ball GB3 is sorted to the route R1 by the first alternate sorting mechanism 304, and the route is set to the route R1 by the second alternate sorting mechanism 305. Assigned to R12. As a result, the game ball GB3 does not pass through the through gate 306 and reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 308. If the opening and closing door 308b of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 is in the open state, it is provided inside the opening and closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the trajectory of the third game ball GB3 is the trajectory L3 shown in FIG.

  When the fourth game ball GB4 following the game ball GB3 enters through the opening 302, the game ball GB4 is distributed to the route R2 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB4 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 308 without passing through the through gate 306, and is provided inside the opening and closing door 308b when the opening and closing door 308b of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 is in the open state. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the trajectory of the fourth game ball GB4 entered is the trajectory L4 shown in FIG.

  In a situation where the fifth game ball following the game ball GB4 enters the ball through the opening 302, the first alternate sorting mechanism 304 is inclined rightward, and the second alternate sorting mechanism 305 is It is in a state inclined to the right side. Therefore, the trajectory of the fifth game ball entered is the same as the trajectory L1 of the first game ball GB1 entered. That is, the second starting port unit 300 of the present embodiment returns to the original state when four game balls enter.

  Here, in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, A case where the first to third high frequency support modes are being executed will be described.

  When the first high-frequency support mode is being executed, the probability of winning in the electric auditors goods opening lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and The number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing door 308b in the case of winning in the accessory opening lottery is set to one, and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the opening / closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308, but the second to fourth game balls GB2 to GB4. Is in a closed state at the timing when the vehicle reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 308. As a result, when the first high frequency support mode is executed, only the first game ball GB1 out of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b in the second start. The ball will enter the mouth 308a.

  In the case where the second high frequency support mode is being executed, the probability of winning in the electric bonus opening lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 306 is set to 100%. The number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing door 308b in the case of winning in the accessory opening lottery is set to one, and the opening time is set to 1.1 seconds. Therefore, the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing ball-in device 308 and the timing when the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball-in device 308. However, at the timing when the third and fourth game balls GB3 to GB4 reach the opening / closing ball entry device 308, they are closed. As a result, when the second high frequency support mode is executed, the first and second game balls GB1, GB2 of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a.

  In the case where the third high frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and The number of times the opening / closing door 308b is opened and the opening time are set to 1.7 seconds in the case of winning in the accessory opening lottery. Therefore, the opening / closing door 308b determines the timing at which the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308, the timing at which the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308, and the third timing. The game ball GB3 is in an open state when it reaches the opening and closing ball-in device 308, but is in a closed state when the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening and closing ball-in device 308. As a result, when the third high frequency support mode is being executed, the first to third game balls GB1 to GB3 of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 80, the type of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and the contents thereof are also described for reference. As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of the high frequency support modes executed after the end of the open / close execution mode include the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the third high frequency support mode. Is set. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the second starting port 308a is set to two.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the big hit lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the value of the big hit type counter C2 obtained is 0 to 9, 8R The mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability-change jackpot, and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 25 to 29, the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability-change jackpot and shifts to the third high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 308a is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, 8R The mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the process shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability-change jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R certain jackpot, and shifts to the third high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, the game balls are fired in a situation where they are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of game balls is defined as the throwing rate, and the throwing rate when the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high frequency support mode is executed is output. It is defined as sphere Mi. Hereinafter, the pitching rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is being executed, the pitching rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is being executed, and the second high frequency support mode are being executed. The pitching rate M3 in the case will be described.

In the first high-frequency support mode, a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. Then, as described above, one of the four game balls fired enters the second starting port 308a of the opening and closing ball input device 308, and two game balls are paid out as prize balls. Will be. Therefore, the pitching rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is being executed is as follows.
M1 = 2/4 = 0.50

  Here, that the throwing rate is less than 1 means that the game balls are continuously emitted at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity at which the game balls can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. Means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced in the situation where the game is being fired. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds, and two game balls are paid out as prize balls. , At a rate of two per 2.4 seconds (one per 1.2 seconds).

In the second high-frequency support mode, game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity at which the game ball firing mechanism 81 can reach the second starting port unit 300. Then, as described above, two of the four game balls fired enter the second starting port 308a of the opening and closing ball input device 308, and the four game balls are paid out as prize balls. Will be. Accordingly, the pitching rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is being executed is as follows.
M2 = 4/4 = 1.00

  Here, the throwing rate of 1 means that the game ball is a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, and is continuously emitted at 0.6 second intervals. This means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease in the situation where the game is being fired. Therefore, in the second high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds and four game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will not increase or decrease.

In the third high-frequency support mode, a situation where game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. As described above, among the four game balls fired, three game balls enter the second starting port 308a of the opening and closing ball-entering device 308, and six game balls are paid out as prize balls. Will be. Therefore, the pitching rate M3 when the third high frequency support mode is being executed is as follows.
M3 = 6/4 = 1.50

  Here, that the throwing rate exceeds 1 means that the game ball is a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81 and is continuously emitted at 0.6 second intervals. Means that the number of game balls held by the player increases in a situation where the game ball is being fired. Therefore, in the third high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player increases. Specifically, in the third high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds and six game balls are paid out as prize balls. , Increasing at a rate of two per 2.4 seconds (one per 1.2 seconds).

  In addition, the ratio of executing the i-th high-frequency support mode to the case where the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is defined as PAi. I do. Then, the ratio PA1 in which the first high frequency support mode is executed, the ratio PA2 in which the second high frequency support mode is executed, and the ratio PA3 in which the third high frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1 = the number of jackpot type counters C2 (0 to 19) to be transferred to the first high-frequency support mode after winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 / the jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2 = 20/30
PA2 = number of jackpot type counters C2 (20 to 24) to be transferred to the second high frequency support mode after winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 / the jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2 = 5/30
PA3 = the number of jackpot type counters C2 (25 to 29) / the jackpot to be transferred to the third high-frequency support mode after winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 Total number of values of type counter C2 = 5/30

  Also, if the total ball-out rate in the case where the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the high frequency support is executed is defined as the first overall ball-out rate T1, , The first overall pitch rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (3).

  In the above expression (3), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in the present embodiment, n = 3. Therefore, the first overall pitching rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.50 × (20/30) + 1.00 × (5/30) + 1.50 × (5/30)
= 0.75

  That is, the first overall pitching rate T1 is the sum of the pitching rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 multiplied by the execution rate, and It means the expected value of the sphere.

  In addition, the ratio of the i-th high frequency support mode executed to the case where the high frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 308a is defined as PBi. I do. Then, the ratio PB1 at which the first high frequency support mode is executed, the ratio PB2 at which the second high frequency support mode is executed, and the ratio PB3 at which the third high frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PB1 = the number of jackpot type counters C2 (0 to 11) to be transferred to the first high-frequency support mode after winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 308a / the jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2 = 12/30
PB2 = number of jackpot type counters C2 (12 to 20) / number of jackpots to be won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 308a and to shift to the second high-frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 9/30
PB3 = the number of jackpot type counters C2 (21-29) / number of jackpots that will be transferred to the third high-frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 308a Total number of values of type counter C2 = 9/30

  Further, if the total ball-out rate in a case where the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a and the high-frequency support is executed is defined as a second total ball-out rate T2, , The second overall pitch rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (4).

  In the above equation (4), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in the present embodiment, n = 3. Therefore, the second overall pitching rate T2 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.50 × (12/30) + 1.00 × (6/30) + 1.50 × (6/30)
= 0.95

  In other words, the second overall pitching rate T2 is the sum of the pitching rate of each high frequency support mode executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 308a multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of the sphere.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the third high frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 can be executed, the value of the first total pitching rate T1 and the second total pitching rate T2 Each of the values is less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

  Next, an example of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processes different from those in the eighth embodiment will be described, and description of the same processes will be omitted.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a winning process for a start-up opening executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIGS. 10 and 74) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and eighth embodiments will be described.

  In step S4706, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls. The processing in the other steps is the same as the processing (FIGS. 10 and 74) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and eighth embodiments, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is that the first to third high-frequency support modes corresponding to the three types of high-frequency support modes are respectively provided. The point is that the flag is stored. The first to third high frequency support flags are used to determine whether the first to third high frequency support modes are being executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  In step S4801, it is determined whether the 16R certain change flag is stored in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag.

  If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R certain change flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: YES), the flow advances to step S4802 to execute a flag erasure process. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying a gaming state. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, the first high frequency support flag, the second high frequency support flag, and the third high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, If these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. After executing Step S4802, the process proceeds to Step S4803.

  In step S4803, the high-probability mode flag is stored, and the process advances to step S4804 to store the third high-frequency support flag. As a result, after ending the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability change jackpot, the game state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the third high frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4805.

  In step S4805, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. After that, the process advances to step S4806 to send a third high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, to the sound emission control device 90. Set as a command to be sent. Thereafter, the shift processing at the end of the main open / close execution mode ends. Note that the sound emission control device 90 that has received the third high frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect indicating to the player that the support mode is the third high frequency support mode. As an effect indicating that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, for example, an effect indicating that it is advantageous to the player even in a situation where the number of game balls is increasing and the jackpot is not easily won. Can be mentioned.

  If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R probable change flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: NO), the process advances to step S4807 to determine whether the RAM 64 stores the 8R probable change flag as the jackpot type flag. judge. If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R certain change flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: YES), the flow advances to step S4808 to execute the flag erasure processing. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4809.

  In step S4809, the high-probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S4810, where the second high-frequency support flag is stored. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability change jackpot is completed, the game state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. It should be noted that the high probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4811.

  In step S4811, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4812, in which the second high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set as a command to be sent. Thereafter, the shift processing at the end of the main open / close execution mode ends. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the second high frequency support command starts control to execute an effect indicating that the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, for example, the gaming balls are not increasing or decreasing, and it is not disadvantageous for the player even in a situation where it is difficult to win a jackpot. Suggestive productions can be mentioned.

  If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R certain change flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: NO), the process advances to step S4813 to execute the flag erasing process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4814.

  In step S4814, after storing the first high frequency support flag, the flow advances to step S4815 to set "100" in the number-of-games counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the first high-frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. As a result, after ending the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the game state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends after 100 times of the game has been executed, and thereafter, the first high-frequency support mode returns to the normal gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Transition. After executing Step S4815, the process proceeds to Step S4816.

  In step S4816, the first high frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the first high frequency support mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set as a command. Thereafter, the shift processing at the end of the main open / close execution mode ends. Note that the sound emission control device 90 that has received the first high-frequency support command starts control to execute an effect that suggests to the player that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. As an effect indicating that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, for example, there is an effect indicating that a situation where the number of game balls is decreasing and a jackpot is not easily won is disadvantageous for the player. Can be.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the electric utility opening / closing processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 77) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that different opening times are set for each of the three types of high-frequency support modes. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  In step S4901, it is determined whether the opening / closing door 308b as the electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the opening and closing door 308b is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the door 308b is open (S4901: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4902.

  In step S4902, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of opening of the door 308b. If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S4902: NO), the electric power opening / closing process ends as it is. That is, when the opening continuation time of the opening / closing door 308b has not ended, the electric-power combination opening / closing processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4902: YES), the flow advances to step S4903 to perform a closing process for controlling the opening / closing door 308b to a closed state. "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the 2-timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the duration of the opening of the door 308b is "0", the door 308b is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is moved to the door 308b. Is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time, and “25” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step S4903, the process proceeds to Step S4904.

  In step S4904, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S4905 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step S4905, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4905: NO), the power-operating opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S4905: YES), the flow advances to step S4906 to clear the supporting flag. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S4901 that the door 308b is not open (S4901: NO), the process advances to step S4907 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the door 308b. If it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4907: NO), the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4907: YES), the flow advances to step S4908 to execute an opening process for controlling the opening / closing door 308b to an open state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4909.

  In step S4909, it is determined whether the operation mode is the open / close execution mode. If it is determined that the operation mode is not the open / close execution mode (S4909: NO), the process proceeds to step S4910 to determine whether the mode is the first high-frequency support mode. Is determined.

  If it is determined in step S4910 that the current mode is the first high-frequency support mode (S4910: YES), the flow advances to step S4911 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4910 that the current mode is not the first high frequency support mode (S4910: NO), the process advances to step S4912 to determine whether the current mode is the second high frequency support mode.

  If it is determined in step S4912 that the current mode is the second high frequency support mode (S4912: YES), the flow advances to step S4913 to set "550" (i.e., 1.1 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4912 that the current mode is not the second high frequency support mode (S4912: NO), the process advances to step S4914 to determine whether the current mode is the third high frequency support mode.

  If it is determined in step S4914 that the current mode is the third high-frequency support mode (S4914: YES), the flow advances to step S4915 to set "850" (that is, 1.7 seconds) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that it is in the open / close execution mode (S4909: YES), or if it is determined in step S4914 that it is not in the third high frequency support mode (S4914: NO), the process proceeds to step S4916. Then, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first game ball GB1 assigned to the route R11 can pass through the through gate 306 and the open / close door 308b is open. Can enter the second starting port 308a. On the other hand, the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 arriving after the first game ball GB1 are distributed to the route R2 or the route R12. When the door 308b is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second starting port 308a. That is, out of the four game balls, only the first game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 306, and each of the four game balls is placed in the second starting port 308a. Whether or not to enter the ball depends on whether or not the door 308b is open at the timing when each of the four game balls reaches the opening and closing device 308. Therefore, while the number of game balls passing through the through gate 306 is one of the four game balls, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a changes depending on the state of the opening / closing door 308b. Can be done.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 controls the opening / closing door 308b based on the result of the motorized accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306. Since three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 arriving after the first game ball GB1 do not pass through the through gate 306, the main control device 60 transmits the four game balls to the opening / closing ball device 308, respectively. The first game determines whether the state of the opening / closing door 308b at the reached timing is set to the closed state or the open state, that is, whether or not each of the four game balls is allowed to enter the second starting port 308a. It is determined based on the result of the electric auditors product opening lottery executed when the ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306 and the type of the support mode. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the four game balls enters the second starting port 308a is realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of the first game ball GB1 through the through gate 306. can do.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time from when the light-emitting display unit of the general-purpose unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the motor-powered object opening lottery is performed is determined by the electric-powered property. The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 which has triggered the open lottery to pass through the through gate 206 to when the game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball input device 208. Therefore, before the timing at which the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 and triggered the lottery for opening the electrically powered accessory reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 308, the ordinary figure unit 38 opens the electrically powered accessory. The result of the lottery can be displayed. Here, the main controller 60 starts the control based on the result of the motorized character opening lottery after displaying the result of the motorized character opening lottery by the general-purpose unit 38, so that the main controller 60 passes through the through gate 306. Therefore, before the timing when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the opening of the electrically-powered accessory reaches the opening and closing ball-entering device 308, the control based on the result of the electrically-driven accessory opening lottery can be started. As a result, the main control device 60 realizes the high-frequency support mode in which the opening and closing door 308b is open at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening and closing ball input device 308. Becomes possible.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 changes the length of time for which the open / close door 208b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state for each type of the high frequency support mode. , The number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a among the four game balls GB1 to GB4 can be made different for each type of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first game ball GB1 enters the second start port 308a and the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are the second start ports. The first high-frequency support mode in which the ball does not enter the ball 308a (ball-out rate M1 = 0.50), the first and second game balls GB1, GB2 enter the second starting port 308a and become the third ball. And the fourth game balls GB3 and GB4 do not enter the second starting port 308a in the second high-frequency support mode (ball-out rate M2 = 1.00), and the first to third game balls GB1 and GB4. A third high frequency support mode (ball exit rate M3 = 1.50) is realized in which GB2 and GB3 enter the second starting port 308a and the fourth game ball GB4 does not enter the second starting port 308a. Have been. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes having different throwing rates can be realized, so that the game can be given inflection and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the alternate sorting mechanism (the first alternate sorting mechanism 304 and the second alternate sorting mechanism 305) that alternately assigns the game ball to any one of the two routes has two stages. Is adopted, so that one game ball GB1 that has reached the second starting port unit 300 is distributed to the route R11 and three game balls GB1, GB2, which have reached after the game ball GB1. The function of distributing GB3 to routes (routes R2 and R12) different from route R11 can be realized by a simple configuration as compared with a configuration realized using electronic control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function using electronic control or the like, for example, a structure in which the number of game balls that have reached the second starting port unit 300 is measured using a counter or the like and driven by an electric force is used. And the like, the game balls can be distributed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as a type of the high frequency support mode, a case where the third high frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 is executable, but the high frequency support mode is executed. Since the pitching rate as a total (the first total pitching rate T1 and the second total pitching rate T2) is less than 1, it is necessary to give the player an exhilaration in the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. By making the first overall pitching rate T1 and the second overall pitching rate T2 less than 1 while making it possible, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit of the player from excessively increasing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 is performed, the number of game balls held by the player increases. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the third high-frequency support mode is desired to be continued for a long time. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 16R probability change jackpot is won, after the open / close execution mode ends, the jackpot lottery mode changes to the high probability mode, and the third high frequency support mode is executed. Then, the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode continue until the next jackpot lottery is won. That is, since the high-probability mode does not end until the next time the jackpot lottery is won (so-called loop machine), it is guaranteed that the jackpot lottery will be won during the high probability mode, and until the jackpot lottery is won, The third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases is continued. Therefore, since the player is guaranteed to win the jackpot lottery during the high probability mode, the player is required to continue the third high frequency support mode for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery as long as possible. You will have a sense of expectation. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a new feeling of expectation that the third high-frequency support mode should be continued for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery as long as possible during the high probability mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in such a configuration, if the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high-probability mode is set low, the probability that the high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode continue for a long time increases. Therefore, the expected value of the number of game balls that can be increased in the third high frequency support mode can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the case where a configuration (so-called special time machine (ST machine)) in which the high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode end after a predetermined number (for example, 120) of jackpots has been executed, Since the player wants to increase the number of game balls by continuing the third high-frequency support mode for as long as possible, the expectation that the player does not want to win the jackpot lottery in the game times shortly after shifting to the high probability mode. However, before the high-probability mode ends, there is an expectation that the player wants to win the jackpot lottery.

  If the player wins the jackpot lottery just after the transition to the high-probability mode, the player feels disappointed that the third high-frequency support mode has ended in a short period of time. As a result, the satisfaction of winning the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ends is also felt. In addition, in the case where the jackpot lottery is won at the game time just before the high-probability mode ends, the player can continue the third high-frequency support mode for a long period of time and greatly increase the number of game balls. You will have a satisfaction and a feeling that you won the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ended. In other words, when the jackpot lottery is won at the game time immediately before the end of the high probability mode, the player can enjoy double satisfaction. In addition, if the jackpot is not won before the high probability mode ends, the player is satisfied that the third high frequency support mode has been continued for a long period and the number of game balls has been significantly increased. On the other hand, while feeling high, you will feel disappointed that you did not win the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ended. That is, since a complicated inflection of the mental state in the high probability mode can be provided to the player, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit will be described. As described below, various configurations can be adopted as the second starting port unit.

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit. For reference, FIG. 84A schematically shows a second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 84 shows the order and distribution destination of the game balls that have entered the second starting port unit.

  FIG. 84 (B) schematically shows a second starting port unit 300B as Example 1. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84A is that the game balls distributed to the route R2 have the second starting port 308a even when the door 308b is open. The point is that it is configured to be impossible to enter the ball. Specifically, since the horizontal length of the opening / closing ball entry device 308 is short, the second and fourth gaming balls regardless of the control mode of the opening / closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode. Cannot enter the second starting port 308a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a among the game balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting port unit 300.

  FIG. 84 (C) schematically shows a second starting port unit 300C as Example 2. FIG. 85 shows a specific configuration of the second starting port unit 300C. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 78 is that the route R2 and the route R12 join to form a single route. According to such a configuration, the size of the second starting port unit can be reduced, so that the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

  FIG. 84 (D) schematically shows a second starting port unit 300D as Example 3. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84 (A) is that a third alternating distribution mechanism 305A is provided downstream of the second alternating distribution mechanism 305. is there. The third alternate sorting mechanism 305A sorts the game balls flowing down the route R11 alternately into a left route R111 and a right route R112.

  The route R111 is configured such that the distributed game balls pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls are in the second state when the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball input device 308 is open. The starting port 308a is configured to be able to enter a ball. The route R112 is configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the sorted game balls are placed in a state where the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball entry device 308 is open. In some cases, it is configured to be able to enter the second starting port 308a.

  According to such a configuration, of the eight game balls that have entered the opening 302 of the second starting port unit 300D, only one game ball passes through the through gate 306. In other words, after one game ball passes through the through gate 306, the next seven game balls do not pass through the through gate 306, and the ninth game ball passes through the through gate 306 again. Therefore, by setting the opening time of the opening / closing door 308b to a different length for each high-frequency support mode, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a can be set to any one of one to eight. Can be set to a value. For example, if the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second starting port 308a, the following eight types are set. High frequency support mode can be realized.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 0.5 seconds The number of entering game balls / the number of game balls fired: 1/8 The number of game balls to be paid out = the number of entering game balls x the number of winning balls: 1 x 2 = 2 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 6 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 2 / 8 = 0.25

・ Second high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of award balls: 2 × 2 = 4 game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired, 4 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds. Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 4 / 8 = 0.50

-Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of award balls: 3 × 2 = 6 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 2 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds. Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 6 / 8 = 0.75

・ 4th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 2.3 seconds The number of game balls entering / the number of game balls fired: 4/8 The number of game balls to be paid out = the number of game balls entered x the number of winning balls: 4 x 2 = 8 game balls increase / decrease: no increase / decrease Throwout rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 8/8 = 1.00

・ Fifth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 5/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of winning balls: 5 × 2 = 10 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 2 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 10 / 8 = 1.25

・ The sixth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 6/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of winning balls: 6 × 2 = 12 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 4 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 12 / 8 = 1.50

・ 7th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entering × number of winning balls: 7 × 2 = 14 Game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired. 6 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds. Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 14 / 8 = 1.75

・ 8th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 8/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of winning balls: 8 × 2 = 16 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 8 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 16 / 8 = 2.00

  As described above, if the configuration of the second starting port unit 300D is adopted, the type of the high frequency support mode can be set in multiple stages. In addition, if the alternate distribution mechanism is configured in more stages, it is possible to further increase the number of game balls that do not pass through the through gate 306, and to set the type of the high frequency support mode to more stages. It becomes possible. In addition, when one game ball enters the second starting port 308a, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls (the number of prize balls) can be set to a value other than one or two. For example, when the prize balls are set to three in the above eight kinds of high frequency support modes, the respective high frequency support modes are as follows.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 0.5 seconds The number of entering game balls / the number of game balls fired: 1/8 The number of game balls to be paid out = the number of entering game balls x the number of winning balls: 1 x 3 = 3 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 5 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds. Launch rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 3 / 8 = 0.375

・ Second high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of award balls: 2 × 3 = 6 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 2 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds. Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 6 / 8 = 0.75

-Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of award balls: 3 × 3 = 9 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, one game ball is increased in 4.8 seconds. Throwout rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 9 / 8 = 1.125

・ 4th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 2.3 seconds The number of game balls entering / the number of game balls fired: 4/8 The number of game balls to be paid out = the number of game balls entered x the number of winning balls: 4 x 3 = 12 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 4 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 12 / 8 = 1.50

・ Fifth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 5/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of award balls: 5 × 3 = 15 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 7 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 15 / 8 pieces = 1.875

・ The sixth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 6/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of winning balls: 6 × 3 = 18 game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired, 10 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 18 / 8 = 2.25

・ 7th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × award ball number: 7 × 3 = 21 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 13 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Throwout rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 21 / 8 = 2.625

・ 8th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening / closing door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entering / number of game balls fired: 8/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of winning balls: 8 × 3 = 24 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired, 16 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball-out rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 24 / 8 = 3.00

  FIG. 84 (E) schematically illustrates a second starting port unit 300E as Example 4. The difference from the second start-up opening unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84 (D) is that game balls distributed to the route R2 enter the second start-up opening 308a even when the opening and closing door 308b is open. The point is that it is configured to be impossible to ball. Specifically, since the horizontal length of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 is short, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth thirteenth irrespective of the control mode of the opening and closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode. The game ball cannot enter the second starting port 308a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a among the game balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting port unit 300E.

  FIG. 84 (F) schematically shows a second starting port unit 300F as Example 5. The difference from the second start-up opening unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84 (D) is that the route R2, the route R12, and the route R112 join to form one route. According to such a configuration, the size of the second starting port unit can be reduced, so that the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

J. Tenth embodiment:
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second start-up opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the eighth embodiment. The difference from the eighth embodiment is that the mode of controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Hereinafter, a mode of control of the opening / closing door 208b will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as in the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and two types of election are performed when the election for opening the electric accessory is elected during the high-frequency support mode. (Two types of electric utilities open) is set. In addition, one type (third-type electric-commerce release) is set as the type of winning in the case of winning the electric-commodity-use opening lottery during the low-frequency support mode. The details of the control of the opening / closing door 208b for each of the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and the winning type of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・ Electric accessory opening lottery during high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of general figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that is allocated to the first class electrical open: 50%
As a result of winning, 50%
When the first electrification is elected Open waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of times the opening / closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time of the opening / closing door 208b: 0.8 sec. Opening time of the opening / closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Number of times the opening / closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time of the opening / closing door 208b: 0.8 second

・ Electric accessory opening lottery during low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of general figure unit 38: 29.5 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be allocated to Type 3 electric utility opening: 100%
-When the 3rd electrification is opened The waiting time for opening the door 208b: 0.25 seconds The number of times the door 208b is opened: once The opening time for the door 208b: 0.2 second

  In the above-described manner of controlling the opening / closing door 208b, the difference between the case where the first-class electric utility is elected and the case where the second-class electronic election is elected during the high-frequency support mode is described by the variable display of the general-purpose unit 38. This is the length of the opening standby time, which is the time from when the door stops to when the opening / closing door 208b starts to transition to the open state. As will be described later, the game ball is released by the game ball firing mechanism 81 at 0.6 second intervals. And the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different in the situation where the shooting balls are continuously fired. Note that the time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game is performed. This is a time shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start-up opening unit 200 in the case where the first-class electric utility is opened. FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the case where the first-class electric utility is opened. In the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the game ball has a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, Fired continuously at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals.

  As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 from the opening 202, it reaches the alternate sorting mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternate sorting mechanism 204 is inclined rightward, the game ball that has reached the alternate sorting mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left holding unit 204e. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise around the rotation axis 204d counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding section 204e, and the state of FIG. A2.

  As shown in the state A2 of FIG. 86, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted leftward, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding unit 204e falls from the left holding unit 204e, and the path R1 on the left side. It is distributed to. Thereafter, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 during the high-frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric accessory opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode. Is set to 100%. Then, in the case of winning the first-class electric utility opening in the electric auditors goods opening lottery, the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b is 0.05 seconds, the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing door 208b is once, and the opening time is 0. Set to 8 seconds. In the present embodiment, as described later, when the main control device 60 determines that the opening standby time has elapsed (FIG. 91: S5123 described later), the main controller 60 starts the transition of the opening / closing door 208b to the open state. The processing to be performed is executed not in the electric-power opening / closing processing in the next tour executed in a cycle of 0.004 seconds, but in the electric-power opening / closing processing in the same tour (FIG. 91: S5124, FIG. 92 described later). For this reason, the time required for control from the elapse of the opening standby time to the start of the transition of the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 to the open state is significantly shorter than 0.004 seconds. I have.

  Therefore, the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball input device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.1 second after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 second (FIG. 87). As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds. At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208, the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. Thereafter, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 allocated to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and the state becomes A3 in FIG.

  As shown in the state A3 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is in a state of being inclined to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held in the right holding section 204f, and the state A4 in FIG. Becomes

  As shown in the state A4 of FIG. 86, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted rightward, the game ball GB2 held in the right holding unit 204f falls from the right holding unit 204f, and the right route R2. It is distributed to. Thereafter, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208, and then the game ball GB2 is opened / closed. The interval until reaching the ball input device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds. . As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a provided inside the opening and closing ball entry device 208. After the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a, the door 208b is closed, and returns to the state A1. Since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is moved before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206 as shown in FIG. Then, it is closed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. In the case of winning the first-class electric utility opening in the motor-operated object opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the timing at which the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric-operator role opening lottery reaches the opening / closing and entering ball device 208 The opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state, and the opening / closing door 208b also maintains the open state at the timing when the game balls GB2 distributed to the route R2 reach the opening / closing ball input device 208. As a result, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, both game balls enter the second starting port 208a.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start-up opening unit 200 in the case where the election for the second-class electric utility has been won. FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and also shows a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the case where the election to open the second type electric utility is performed. 88 and 89 are different from the examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 in that the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds and the opening gate 208b passes through the through gate 206. The point is that the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 from the opening 202, it reaches the alternate sorting mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternate sorting mechanism 204 is inclined rightward, the game ball that has reached the alternate sorting mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left holding unit 204e. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding section 204e, and becomes the state A2. .

  As shown in the state A2 in FIG. 88, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding unit 204e falls from the left holding unit 204e, and the path R1 on the left side. It is distributed to. Thereafter, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 during the high-frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric accessory opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode. Is set to 100%. Then, in the case of winning the first-class electric utility opening in the electric auditors goods opening lottery, the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b is 0.25 seconds, the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing door 208b is one, and the opening time is 0. Set to 8 seconds. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the time required for control from the elapse of the opening standby time to the start of the transition of the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entry device 208 to the open state is 0.004. The time is much shorter than seconds.

  Accordingly, the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball input device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.3 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (FIG. 89). As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when a game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening / closing and entering device 208 is about 0.2 seconds. At the timing when the passed game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b is kept in the closed state, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a, but is opened and closed. Pass 208. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and the state becomes A3 in FIG.

  As shown in a state A3 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is in a state of being inclined to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held in the right holding section 204f, and becomes the state A4.

  As shown in a state A4 in FIG. 88, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined rightward, the game ball GB2 held in the right holding unit 204f falls from the right holding unit 204f, and the right route R2. It is distributed to. Thereafter, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208, and then the game ball GB2 is opened / closed. The interval until reaching the ball input device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds, the opening and closing door 208b is in an open state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening and closing ball input device 208. . As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a provided inside the opening and closing ball entry device 208. After the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a, the door 208b is closed, and returns to the state A1. Since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is moved before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206 as shown in FIG. Then, it is closed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. In the case of winning the second-class electric utility in the motor-operated object opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode, when the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric-operator role opening lottery reaches the opening / closing and entering ball device 208 at the timing. The opening / closing door 208b keeps the closed state, and at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208, the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state. As a result, one game ball GB2 out of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second starting port 208a.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b, the second time per 1.2 seconds (FIGS. 87 and 89) from when the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 is changed. 2 The number of game balls entering the start port 208a can be changed.

  Note that, in the case of winning the third-class electric utility opening in the electric accessory opening lottery in the low-frequency support mode, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 is 29.5 seconds, and the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is 0. Since it is set to 25 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state after the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 pass through the opening / closing ball input device 208. That is, in the case of winning the third type electric utility opening in the electric accessory opening lottery in the low frequency support mode, both the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 do not enter the second starting port 208a.

  Next, an example of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processes different from those in the eighth embodiment will be described, and description of the same processes will be omitted.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the high-frequency support flag is added to the high-frequency support The point is that the type is not set. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  Main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the high frequency support flag in step S5004. As a result, after ending the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability change jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Further, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores a high frequency support flag in step S5007. Thus, after ending the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 75) executed by main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the electronic support process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 76) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the opening wait time corresponding to the election opening type selected in the electric accessory opening lottery is set. The point to set. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  In step S5101, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S5101 that the support flag is not stored (S5101: NO), the process advances to step S5102.

  In step S5102, it is determined whether the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the electrification opening is won in the electric auditors character opening lottery, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored. If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is not stored (S5102: NO), the process advances to step S5103.

  In step S5103, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S5103 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S5103: NO), the present electric power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5103: YES), the process proceeds to step S5104.

  In step S5104, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of the symbol in the ordinary figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S5104 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S5104: YES), the process advances to step S5105 to set the out-of-range display, and then ends the electric power support process. By setting the off display, the change display of the symbol in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated in a state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5104 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S5104: NO), the process proceeds to step S5106.

  In step S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is “0” (S5106: NO), the present electrical role support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0” (S5106: YES), the process advances to step S5107.

  In step S5107, it is determined whether the operation mode is the open / close execution mode. Thereafter, the process advances to step S5108 to determine whether the operation mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S5107 (S5107: NO), and if the high frequency support mode is in step S5108 (S5108: YES), the process proceeds to step S5109 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric winning holding area 64c is shifted to the lottery execution area, and the value of the lottery execution area is compared with the electric auditors goods opening lottery table for the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the motor-powered object opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to 100%, the rate of being allocated to the first-class electric utility opening is 50%, and the second-class electric utility opening is set. The distribution ratio is set to 50%. Specifically, since the possible value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249, if the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 124, In the case where the election for opening the first electrical role is won and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 125 to 249, the election for opening the second electrical winning is won. Then, after the electric accessory opening lottery is executed, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5110.

  In step S5110, it is determined whether or not the result of the electrically-powered accessory opening lottery in step S5109 is an election opening (winning support). In step S5110, if it is determined that the result of the electric auditors goods opening lottery is a support win (S5110: YES), the process proceeds to step S5111, where the support win flag is stored and provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "1" is set to the second round counter area RC2. In the present embodiment, if the first election is opened as a result of the election opening in the high frequency support mode, the first election flag is stored, and the second election is opened. When the winning is achieved, the second type support winning flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5112. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5110 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support winning (S5110: NO), the process proceeds to step S5112 without executing the process of step S5111.

  In step S5112, it is determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S5112 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode (S5112: YES), the process proceeds to step S5113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5112 that the winning / rejection lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S5112: NO), the main control process ends.

  In step S5113, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is “0”. In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game is completed. If it is determined in step S5113 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S5113: NO), the present electric power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5113 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the flow advances to step S5114 to clear the high frequency support flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5115.

  In step S5115, the low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. After that, the processing for electric role support ends.

  If it is determined in step S5107 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S5107: YES), or if it is determined in step S5118 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S5108: NO), the process proceeds to step S5116 to open the electric accessory. I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electrical winning holding area 64c is shifted, and the value of the lottery execution area is compared with the motorized accessory opening lottery table for the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the motor-powered object opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to 10%, and the ratio of being allocated to the third-class electric opening is set to 100%. Specifically, since the possible value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249, if the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 24, You will be elected to open three types of electric work. Further, after the electric accessory opening lottery is executed, “14750” (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5117.

  In step S5117, it is determined whether or not the result of the electrically-powered object opening lottery in step S5116 is winning (support winning) for opening the electric utility. If it is determined in step S5117 that the support has not been won (S5117: NO), the main processing for power combination ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5117 that the support has been won (S5117: YES), the flow advances to step S5118 to store the support win flag and set "1" in the second round counter area RC2. The processing for this electric role support ends.

  If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is stored (S5102: YES), the process advances to step S5119 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S5119: NO), the symbol in the general-purpose unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, and therefore, the process for supporting the electric hand as it is. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S5119: YES), the process proceeds to step S5120.

  In step S5120, a hit display corresponding to the type of election opening that has been won is set. As a result, the variation display of the symbols in the ordinary symbol unit 38 ends, and the symbols corresponding to the type of the hit display are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5121.

  In step S5121, an open standby time corresponding to the elected electrical open type is set. More specifically, if the first electrification is elected, “25” (ie, 0.05 sec) is set in the opening standby time timer counter area Tw, and the second electrification is opened or the third electrification is released. When the opening is won, "125" (that is, 0.25 sec) is set in the opening standby time timer counter area Tw. The open standby time timer counter area Tw is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started. After that, the process advances to step S5122 to store the supporting flag and delete the support winning flag. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

  If it is determined in step S5101 that the support flag is stored (S5101: YES), the process advances to step S5123 to determine whether the opening standby time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is “0”. If it is determined in step S5123 that the value of the opening standby time timer counter area Tw is “0” (S5123: YES), the process advances to step S5124 to control the opening and closing of the opening / closing door 208b as the electric accessory. Executes the electronic opening / closing process. The details of the electrical opening / closing process will be described later. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5123 that the value of the opening standby time timer counter area Tw is not “0” (S5123: NO), the electric power support processing ends without executing the electric power opening / closing processing. I do.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the electric opening / closing processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that, when the election is released during the high-frequency support mode, the elected election Regardless of the type of opening, the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, and the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.2 seconds when the electrification is elected in the low frequency support mode. Is set to Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  In step S5201, it is determined whether the opening / closing door 208b as the electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the opening / closing door 208b is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the door 208b is open (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202.

  In step S5202, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of opening of the door 208b. In step S5202, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S5202: NO), the electric-power combination opening / closing processing ends as it is. That is, when the opening continuation time of the opening / closing door 208b has not ended, the present electric combination opening / closing processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5202: YES), the flow advances to step S5203 to perform a closing process for controlling the opening / closing door 208b to a closed state. "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the 2-timer counter area T2. In addition, the value of the second timer counter area T2 set in step S5203 is such that the opening / closing door 208b as the electric accessory is opened a plurality of times in one winning of the electric accessory opening lottery. It means the length of time (interval) from the closing to the next opening, and is the last transition from the open state to the closed state of the opening / closing door 208b triggered by one winning of the electric accessory opening lottery. In this case, it means the length of time to wait from when the opening / closing door 208b closes until the next electric accessory opening lottery is executed. After executing Step S5203, the process proceeds to Step S5204.

  In step S5204, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S5205 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step S5205, when it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S5205: NO), the present electrical hand opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S5205: YES), the flow advances to step S5206 to clear the supporting flag. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S5201 that the door 208b is not being opened (S5201: NO), the process advances to step S5207 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the opening / closing door 208b. In step S5207, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5207: NO), the power-operating opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5207: YES), the flow advances to step S5208 to execute an opening process for controlling the opening / closing door 208b to the open state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5209.

  In step S5209, it is determined whether the operation is in the open / close execution mode. If it is determined that the operation is not in the open / close execution mode (S5209: NO), the process proceeds to step S5210 to determine whether the operation is in the high frequency support mode. Is determined.

  If it is determined in step S5210 that the current mode is the high-frequency support mode (S5210: YES), the process proceeds to step S5211, and “400” (that is, 0.8 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5210 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S5210: NO), and if it is determined in step S5209 that it is in the open / close execution mode (S5209: YES), the process proceeds to step S5212. Then, “100” (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the same effect as in the above-described eighth embodiment is obtained, and the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 by changing the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b. It is possible to change the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a per 1.2 seconds (FIGS. 87 and 89) from the start. Therefore, intonation can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), if the length of the opening standby time is changed. Since the number of gaming balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed, the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 is set to the same length (0.05 seconds in the present embodiment) during the high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing door 208b Is set to a plurality of lengths (0.05 seconds and 0.25 seconds in this embodiment) so that the opening / closing door 208b is opened from the closed state after the game ball passes through the through gate 206. The time until the transition to the state is started (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general-purpose unit 38 to when the opening / closing door 208b starts transition from the closed state to the open state (opening of the opening / closing door 208b). By changing the standby time, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the opening / closing door 208b starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening / closing door 208b) Waiting time for opening) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, during the high-frequency support mode, the main control device 60 controls the fluctuating time of the general-purpose unit 38 so that the game ball GB1 is opened and closed after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206. The time is set to be shorter than the time required to reach the ball device 208. Therefore, before the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery for opening the electric accessory reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, the general figure unit 38 determines the result of the lottery for opening the electric accessory. It can be displayed. As a result, the main control device 60 determines that the game ball GB1 has passed through the through gate 206 and has been the trigger of the motorized accessory opening lottery after the result of displaying the result of the motorized accessory opening lottery by the general-purpose unit 38. It is possible to execute a control to start the transition from the closed state to the open state of the open / close door 208b (control in the case where the first-class electric win is opened) before the timing when the vehicle reaches the open / close ball input device 208. Become. Therefore, the game ball GB1 that triggered the transition of the opening / closing door 208b to the open state (the game ball GB1 that passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery for opening the electric accessory) enters the second start port 208a. Control can be performed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the first-class electric utility is elected (FIGS. 86 and 87), the main control device 60 sets the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b to 0.05 second. At the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. On the other hand, in a case where the second-class electric utility is elected (FIGS. 88 and 89), the main controller 60 sets the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b to 0.25 seconds, and thus passes through the through gate 206. At the timing when the game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208, the opening / closing door 208b has not yet transitioned to the open state, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a. That is, according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed by changing the opening standby time, so that intonation can be added to the game, and Amusement can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b is set based on the type of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode. However, the opening / closing door 208b is set based on other factors. The configuration may be such that the opening standby time of the opening 208b is set. For example, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of support modes can be executed, the configuration may be such that the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to a different length for each type of support mode. Further, the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b may be set to a different length for each type of the jackpot lottery mode (low-probability mode and high-probability mode). Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a random number counter for setting the opening standby time is provided, and the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is set based on the value of the obtained random number counter. In addition, in the case of winning the jackpot lottery, in a predetermined number of game times after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the winning is completed, based on the type that has won the jackpot lottery, the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b. May be set.

  In the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is changed by changing the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b. By doing so, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a may be changed. Further, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a may be changed by changing both the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b. In addition, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is changed by changing the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in addition to the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b and the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38. It may be.

  Further, the configuration in which the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is changed by changing the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is described in the second starting port units 300 and 300B to ninth embodiment described above. 300F (FIGS. 78, 84, and 85).

K. Eleventh embodiment:
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described. This embodiment includes the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the tenth embodiment. The difference from the tenth embodiment is that the mode of controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Hereinafter, a mode of control of the opening / closing door 208b will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as in the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, three types of high-frequency support modes are set, and one type (first-type electric-commerce-opening) is set in the case of winning the electric-power-operated-object opening lottery during the high-frequency support mode. Have been. In addition, one type (second-type electric-commerce release) is set as the type of winning when the electric-power-operated-goods open lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode. The details of the control of the opening / closing door 208b for each of the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and the winning type of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・ Electrical accessory opening lottery during the first high frequency support mode Fluctuating time of general figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be allocated to the first class electrical open: 100%
When the first electrification is elected: Open standby time of the door 208b: 0.95 seconds Number of times the door 208b is opened: once Open time of the door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Electric accessory opening lottery during the second high-frequency support mode Variation time of general figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be allocated to the first class electrical open: 100%
-When the first-class electric utility is elected Open: Waiting time for opening the door 208b: 0.25 seconds Number of times the door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the door 208b: 0.8 second

・ Electric accessory opening lottery during the 3rd high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of general figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be allocated to the first class electrical open: 100%
When the first electrification is opened: Opening time of the open / close door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of times the open / close door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time of the open / close door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Electric accessory opening lottery during low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of general figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be allocated to Type 2 electric utility opening: 100%
When the second electrification is elected Open waiting time of the open / close door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of times the open / close door 208b is opened: 1 time Open time of the open / close door 208b: 0.2 second

  In the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b described above, the difference between the three high-frequency support modes is the time from when the variable display of the general-purpose unit 38 stops to when the opening / closing door 208b starts to shift to the open state. This is the length of the open standby time. As will be described later, in the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals by the game ball firing mechanism 81, the game balls entering the second starting port 208a are The numbers are different. Note that the time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game is performed. This is a time shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the first high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 93, the game ball has a constant firing intensity that can reach the second start-up opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, and has a strength of 0.6. Fired consecutively at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. The game ball that has entered the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are sorted is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the general figure unit 38 starts. . After elapse of 0.05 seconds as the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38 and 0.95 seconds as the opening standby time, the opening / closing door 208b transits to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed door 208b for 0.10 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. The third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206 and enters the second start port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing of reaching the opening / closing apparatus 208. I do. At the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, so that the fluctuation display of the general-purpose unit 38 is not started and is suspended.

  Then, when 0.8 seconds elapse and the opening / closing door 208b shifts to the closed state, the fluctuating display of the reserved general-purpose unit 38 starts. As can be understood from FIG. 93, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening / closing ball-entering device 208 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation display of the general-purpose unit 38 starts. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the normal figure unit 38. Therefore, the relationship that only the game ball GB3 among the game balls GB1 to GB3 enters the second starting port 208a continues even after the game ball GB4. The first high frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above is summarized as follows. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the second starting port 208a is set to two.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/3 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of award balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase / decrease of game balls: 3 The number of game balls is reduced by one in 1.8 seconds when three game balls are fired. Ball-out rate: The number of game balls to be paid out / the number of game balls fired = 2/3 = 0.67

  FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208 and the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the second high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the game ball has a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, and is 0.6 mm. Fired consecutively at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. The game ball that has entered the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are sorted is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the general figure unit 38 starts. . After elapse of 0.05 seconds as the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and 0.25 seconds as the opening standby time, the opening / closing door 208b transits to the open state, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed door 208b for 0.30 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing of reaching the opening / closing ball entry device 208. The behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is the repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the behavior of the second game ball GB2, and a description thereof will be omitted. The second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above is summarized as follows.

・ Second high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/2 Number of paid out game balls = Number of game balls entered × Number of award balls: 1 × 2 = 2 Increase / decrease of game balls: Increase / decrease None Launch rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 2/2 = 1.00

  FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and also shows a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the third high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the game ball has a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, and is 0.6 mm. Fired consecutively at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. The game ball that has entered the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are sorted is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in the third high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the general figure unit 38 starts. . After elapse of 0.05 seconds as the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and 0.05 seconds as the opening standby time, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second starting port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing of reaching the opening / closing ball-in device 208. The behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is the repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the behavior of the second game ball GB2, and a description thereof will be omitted. The third high frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above is summarized as follows.

-Third high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of award balls: 2 × 2 = 4 Increase / decrease of game balls: 2 The number of game balls increased by 2 in 1.2 seconds when the number of game balls are fired Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of fired game balls = 4/2 = 2.00

  FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing a timing at which a game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208 and a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the low frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the game ball has a constant firing strength that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, and has a strength of 0.6. Fired consecutively at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. The game ball that has entered the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are sorted is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the low frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the general figure unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38, and 0.35 seconds, which is the opening standby time, elapse, the opening / closing door 208b transits to the open state with a probability of 10%. Hold for seconds. In the following, a case will be described in which a second type electrification is won with a probability of 10%.

  The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed door 208b for 0.40 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. At the timing when the second game ball GB2 arrives at the opening / closing ball input device 208, the opening / closing door 208b has already transitioned to the closed state, and therefore does not enter the second start port 208a, and thus is closed. 208b. The behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is the repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the behavior of the second game ball GB2, and a description thereof will be omitted. The low-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above is summarized as follows.

・ Low frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 0/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of prize balls: 0 × 2 = 0 = 0 Increase / decrease of game balls: 2 The number of game balls decreases by 2 in 1.2 seconds when the number of game balls is fired Launch rate: The number of game balls to be paid out / the number of game balls fired = 0/2/2 = 0

  FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 97, the type of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and the contents thereof are also described for reference. As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of the high frequency support modes executed after the end of the open / close execution mode include the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the third high frequency support mode. Is set.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 15 by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 and the obtained value is 0 to 15, the sorting is performed. The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and after the end of the open / close execution mode, 3 Shift to the high frequency support mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is an 8R probability-change jackpot, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability-change jackpot, and the second Move to high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5 by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 208a, the distribution is performed. The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and after the end of the open / close execution mode, 3 Shift to the high frequency support mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the distribution result is an 8R probability-change jackpot, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability-change jackpot, and the second Move to high frequency support mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the result of the distribution is a 16R probability change jackpot, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability change jackpot. Move to high frequency support mode.

  The high-frequency support mode, which is shifted after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) has been executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Shift to low frequency support mode. In addition, the high-frequency support mode, which is shifted after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probable jackpot, continues without ending until the next jackpot lottery is won. In addition, the high probability mode, which shifts after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability change jackpot, continues without ending until the next jackpot lottery is won.

  Further, the first overall pitching rate T1 and the second overall pitching rate T2 in the present embodiment are as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.67 × (16/30) + 1.00 × (10/30) + 2.00 × (4/30) = 0.96
T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.67 × (6/30) + 1.00 × (18/30) + 2.00 × (6/30) = 0.83

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first overall pitch rate T1 and the value of the second overall pitch rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1 and the second high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate is 1 are changed by changing the opening standby time. Since the mode and the third high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 can be executed, inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the time during which the opening / closing door 208b maintains the open state is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the length of the opening standby time is reduced. If changed, the above-described three high-frequency support modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the first high-frequency support in which the throwing rate is less than 1 is provided by the second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) having a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution mechanism 204. A mode, a second high frequency support mode in which the pitching rate is 1, and a third high frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, in order to execute the three high-frequency support modes, as compared with the configuration in which the three high-frequency support modes are executed by the second starting port unit 300 (FIG. 78) including the two alternate distribution mechanisms 304 and 305. Since this mechanism can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, for example, by placing another accessory in an empty game area.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 4R normal jackpot A, the high probability mode is not started, but the first high frequency support mode is started. When the first high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of game balls to the entry section is promoted, and the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the pitching rate in the first high frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first high frequency support mode ends when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number and the first high-frequency support mode ends, the player plays a game while expecting the jackpot lottery to be a jackpot. Further, the player plays the game while expecting the jackpot to be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery as early as possible in order to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls in hand.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 8R probability change jackpot, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is improved. Further, when the second high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball to the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Further, since the pitching rate in the second high frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Then, the high probability mode is continued at least until the result of the jackpot is a jackpot (various jackpots). In addition, the second high frequency support mode is continued until the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot (various jackpots). Therefore, since the high-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue until the jackpot becomes a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the player expects that the result of the jackpot lottery will be the 8R probability variable jackpot and the high probability mode will continue. While playing the game. Further, since the number of game balls on hand does not increase or decrease, the player can concentrate his or her mind on the type of the result when the result of the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 4R normal jackpot, the high probability mode is not started, but the third high frequency support mode is started. When the third high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of game balls into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Further, since the pitching rate in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third high frequency support mode ends when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the player can continue the third high frequency support mode until immediately before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number to increase the number of game balls on hand, but before the third high frequency support mode ends. By the time you play the game, expecting the jackpot lottery results to be a jackpot. Then, even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not become a jackpot until the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the prescribed number (100 times), the player operates in the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. Satisfaction that the longest period has been maintained can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new game property of effectively giving the player various expectations by using the three control modes. Can be planned. Further, according to the present embodiment, even in the same 4R regular jackpot, the inflection can be added to the game by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode to be shifted to after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a reach, a longer fluctuating time is set as the fluctuating time of the special figure unit 37 than when the result of the jackpot lottery is out. You. During the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, the greater the number of times that the result of the jackpot lottery has reached the reach, that is, the greater the number of times that the long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37, The time required for the number of executions of the jackpot lottery (game times) to reach the specified number of times 100 increases. As a result, the period during which the third high-frequency support continues is also prolonged, and the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases is also prolonged. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed, a new gaming property is created in which the number of gaming balls increases as the number of times the jackpot lottery result reaches the occurrence of the reach increases. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that, as another embodiment, a longer time may be set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 as the number of jackpot lotteries executed after the third high frequency support mode is started is increased. According to this configuration, as the number of executions of the jackpot lottery approaches 100, which is the specified number, the fluctuation time of the set special figure unit 37 becomes longer, so that the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases is continued. The period of time is longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frustration of the player who does not win the jackpot lottery even though the number of executions of the jackpot lottery is approaching 100 times.

  Further, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a high-frequency support mode in which the opening standby time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high-frequency support mode is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate is smaller than in the first high-frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of the high frequency support modes are executed by setting the opening standby time to a plurality of lengths. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of types of high frequency support modes are executed by setting the length.

L. Twelfth embodiment:
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. This embodiment includes the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the eleventh embodiment. The difference from the eleventh embodiment is that the high-probability mode ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) is executed without winning the jackpot lottery (so-called special time). (The ST machine) and the contents of the distribution table are different. The following mainly describes differences from the eleventh embodiment. The description of the same configuration and processing as in the eleventh embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 98 also shows the type of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and the contents thereof for reference.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 15 by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the obtained value is 0 to 15, the sorting is performed. The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and after the end of the open / close execution mode, 3 Shift to the high frequency support mode. If the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is an 8R probability-change jackpot, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability-change jackpot, and the second Move to high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (b), if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 17 by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a and the obtained value is 0 to 17, the distribution is performed. The result is the 10R probability change jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability change jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 18 to 26, the distribution result is 10R certain-variable jackpot B, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 10R certain-variable jackpot, and after the end of the open / close execution mode, 2 Shift to the high frequency support mode. If the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 27 to 29, the distribution result is 10R certain-variable jackpot C, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 10R certain-variable jackpot. 3 Shift to the high frequency support mode.

  The high-frequency support mode, which is shifted after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) has been executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Shift to low frequency support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the high-frequency support mode in which the mode shifts after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability change jackpot, a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) is achieved without winning the jackpot lottery. Is terminated when the command is executed, and the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. In addition, the high probability mode to which the mode is shifted after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability change jackpot is also ended when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) is executed without winning the jackpot lottery.

  Further, the first overall pitching rate T1 and the second overall pitching rate T2 in the present embodiment are as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.67 × (16/30) + 1.00 × (10/30) + 2.00 × (4/30) = 0.96
T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.67 × (18/30) + 1.00 × (9/30) + 2.00 × (3/30) = 0.90

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first overall pitch rate T1 and the value of the second overall pitch rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 10R certain-variable jackpot A, the high probability mode is started and the first high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is improved. Further, when the first high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of game balls into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the pitching rate in the first high frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode end when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting the jackpot lottery to be a jackpot as early as possible before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number and the high probability mode ends. Further, the player plays the game while expecting the jackpot lottery to be made earlier in order to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand, even from the expectation of minimizing the decrease.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes 10R certain variation jackpot B, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is improved. In addition, when the second high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of game balls into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Also, since the pitching rate in the second high-frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. The high-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode end when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting the jackpot lottery to be a jackpot as early as possible before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number and the high probability mode ends.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 10R certain-variable jackpot C, the high probability mode is started and the third high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is improved. In addition, when the third high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of game balls into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Further, since the pitching rate in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. Then, the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode are ended when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the player continues the third high-frequency support mode until the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number and increases the number of game balls on hand, but the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number and increases. The game is performed while expecting that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the probability mode and the third high frequency support mode end. Then, even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not become a jackpot until the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the prescribed number (100 times), the player operates in the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. Satisfaction that the longest period has been maintained can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new game property that gives the player various expectations in the period in which the high-probability mode with the limited number of times is being executed. Amusement can be improved. Further, according to the present embodiment, even in the case of the same 10R probability change jackpot, it is possible to add inflection to the game by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode which is shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a reach, a longer fluctuating time is set as the fluctuating time of the special figure unit 37 than when the result of the jackpot lottery is out. You. During the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, the greater the number of times that the result of the jackpot lottery has reached the reach, that is, the greater the number of times that the long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37, The time required for the number of executions of the jackpot lottery (game times) to reach the specified number of times 100 increases. As a result, the period during which the third high-frequency support continues is also prolonged, and the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases is also prolonged. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed, a new gaming property is created in which the number of gaming balls increases as the number of times the jackpot lottery result reaches the occurrence of the reach increases. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the longer the jackpot lottery executed after the start of the third high-frequency support mode, the longer the variable time of the special figure unit 37 is. According to this configuration, as the number of executions of the jackpot lottery approaches 100, which is the prescribed number, the fluctuation time of the set special figure unit 37 becomes longer, so that the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases is continued. The time to do it is longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frustration of the player who does not win the jackpot lottery even though the number of executions of the jackpot lottery is approaching 100.

  Further, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a high-frequency support mode in which the opening standby time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high-frequency support mode is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate is smaller than in the first high-frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of the high frequency support modes are executed by setting the opening standby time to a plurality of lengths. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of types of high frequency support modes are executed by setting the length.

M. Thirteenth embodiment:
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment includes the same second start-up opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the twelfth embodiment is that the mode of controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Hereinafter, a mode of control of the opening / closing door 208b will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as in the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and one type (first-type electronic role opening) is set as the type of winning when the election for opening the electric accessory is won during the high-frequency support mode. Have been. Then, three types of fluctuation times (0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, and 0.05 seconds) of the general-purpose unit 38 set during the high-frequency support mode are prepared. In addition, one type (second-type electric-commerce release) is set as the type of winning when the electric-power-operated-goods open lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode. The details of the control of the opening / closing door 208b for each of the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and the winning type of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・ Electric accessory opening lottery during high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of general figure unit 38: Any of 0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds or 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be allocated to the first class electrical open: 100%
When the first electrification is elected: Open standby time of the door 208b: 0.95 seconds Number of times the door 208b is opened: once Open time of the door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Electric accessory opening lottery during low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of general figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be allocated to Type 2 electric utility opening: 100%
When the second electrification is elected Open waiting time of the open / close door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of times the open / close door 208b is opened: 1 time Open time of the open / close door 208b: 0.2 second

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals by the game ball firing mechanism 81 because the length of the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 set during the high-frequency support mode is different. The number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a under different circumstances. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given. Note that the time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game is performed. This is a time shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 99 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 99, the game ball has a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, and has a strength of 0.6. Fired consecutively at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. The game ball that has entered the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are sorted is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the general figure unit 38 starts. When 0.95 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and 0.05 seconds as the opening standby time elapse, the opening / closing door 208b transits to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed door 208b for 0.10 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. The third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206 and enters the second start port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing of reaching the opening / closing apparatus 208. I do. At the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, so that the fluctuation display of the general-purpose unit 38 is not started and is suspended.

  Then, when 0.8 seconds elapse and the opening / closing door 208b shifts to the closed state, the fluctuating display of the reserved general-purpose unit 38 starts. As can be understood from FIG. 99, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening / closing ball input device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the general-purpose unit 38. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the normal figure unit 38. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the regular figure unit 38 is continuously set to 0.95 seconds, only the game ball GB3 of the game balls GB1 to GB3 enters the second start port 208a. The relationship will continue even after the game ball GB4.

  The manner in which the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high-frequency support mode described above is summarized as follows. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the second starting port 208a is set to two.

-High frequency support mode (variable time of normal figure unit = 0.95 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/3 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of award balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase / decrease of game balls: 3 The number of game balls is reduced by one in 1.8 seconds when three game balls are fired. Ball-out rate: The number of game balls to be paid out / the number of game balls fired = 2/3 = 0.67

  FIG. 100 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 100, the game ball has a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and has a strength of 0.6. Fired consecutively at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. The game ball that has entered the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are sorted is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the general-purpose unit 38 starts. When 0.25 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and 0.05 seconds as the opening standby time elapse, the opening / closing door 208b transits to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

  The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed door 208b for 0.30 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing of reaching the opening / closing ball entry device 208. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, if the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 is continuously set to 0.25 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 Since the behavior is repeated, the description is omitted.

  The manner in which the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high-frequency support mode described above is summarized as follows.

・ High-frequency support mode (variable time of ordinary figure unit 38 = 0.25 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase / decrease of game balls: Increase / decrease None Launch rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 2/2 = 1.00

  FIG. 101 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and shows a case where the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the third high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 101, the game ball has a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and has a strength of 0.6. Fired consecutively at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at 0.6 second intervals. The game ball that has entered the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are sorted is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the general figure unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 and 0.05 seconds as the opening standby time elapse, the opening / closing door 208b transits to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second starting port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing of reaching the opening / closing ball-in device 208. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, if the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 is continuously set to 0.05 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 Since the behavior is repeated, the description is omitted.

  The manner in which the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the high frequency support mode described above is summarized as follows.

・ High-frequency support mode (variable time of ordinary figure unit 38 = 0.05 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of award balls: 2 × 2 = 4 Increase / decrease of game balls: 2 The number of game balls increased by 2 in 1.2 seconds when the number of game balls are fired Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of fired game balls = 4/2 = 2.00

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the pitching rate during the high-frequency support mode by changing the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 during the high-frequency support mode. That is, by changing the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 during the high-frequency support mode, the number of game balls held by the player can be increased, maintained, or decreased.

  In the present embodiment, when a normal jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery, the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high frequency support mode is won or if the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches 100 without winning the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high frequency support mode, The high frequency support mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, the period after the normal jackpot is won and the high frequency support mode is shifted to the end of the high frequency support mode is referred to by referring to the variable time table for the high frequency support mode. , The fluctuating time of the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuating time of the ordinary figure unit 38 are set. However, even in the period of referring to the fluctuation time table for the high frequency support mode, when setting the fluctuation time of the game times that will win the jackpot lottery, or setting the fluctuation time of the game times that causes reach In this case, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 is set by referring to the fluctuation time table for big hits and the fluctuation time table for reach generation.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a variable time table for the high frequency support mode. FIG. 102A shows a variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 102B shows a variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38 are set by referring to the fluctuation time table set A for the high frequency support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is set as a result of the big hit lottery, and when the small hit is won in the high frequency support mode, the table to be referred is changed time table set A for the high frequency support mode, Switching is made between the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode. Note that the small hit is a lottery result that shifts to the open / close execution mode but does not change the support mode and the lottery mode.

  As shown in FIG. 102A, the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode includes a special figure unit table A and a general figure unit table A.

  In the special figure unit table A, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored in association with each other. In this embodiment, during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30, 1.0 second is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 1.6 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 2.2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37.

  The table A for the general-purpose unit stores the number of times of the game after the shift to the high-frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 in association with each other. In FIG. 102 (A), for reference, the number of game balls increases or decreases when the fluctuation time is set, and the game balls enter the second starting port 208a when the fluctuation time is set. Intervals are shown.

  In the present embodiment, during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 1 to 30, 0.05 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting port 208a at a rate of one per 0.6 seconds, and the number of the game balls held by the player increases. During a period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 0.25 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting port 208a at a rate of one every 1.2 seconds, and the number of the game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting port 208a at a rate of one every 1.8 seconds, and the number of the game balls held by the player decreases.

  As shown in FIG. 102B, the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode includes a special figure unit table B and a general figure unit table B.

  In the special figure unit table B, the number of times of the game after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored in association with each other. In the present embodiment, 2.2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 during a period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 1.6 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 1.0 second is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37.

  In the general-purpose unit table B, the number of times of the game after shifting to the high-frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 are stored in association with each other. In FIG. 102 (B), for reference, the number of game balls increases or decreases when the fluctuation time is set, and the game balls enter the second starting port 208a when the fluctuation time is set. Intervals are shown.

  In the present embodiment, during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 1 to 30, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting port 208a at a rate of one every 1.8 seconds, and the number of the game balls held by the player decreases. During a period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 0.25 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting port 208a at a rate of one every 1.2 seconds, and the number of the game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 0.05 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting port 208a at a rate of one per 0.6 seconds, and the number of the game balls held by the player increases.

  FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an increase or decrease in the number of game balls held by the player during the high frequency support mode. FIG. 103 (A) shows an example of increase / decrease of the game balls when the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and FIG. 103 (B) shows the variable time table for the high frequency support mode. An example of the increase and decrease of the game balls when the set B is selected is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 During the game, the number of game balls held by the player increases. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), the number of game balls held by the player at the time when the 100 times of the game has been completed is greater than the time when the high frequency support mode is started.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 During the game, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During a period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (B), the number of game balls held by the player at the time when the 100 times of the game has been completed is greater than the time when the high frequency support mode is started.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, during the high frequency support mode, during a period in which the ratio of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is large, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 is shorter as the fluctuation time is shorter. It is set (FIG. 102). Therefore, the jackpot lottery held by the game ball entering the second starting port 208a during the fluctuation of the special figure unit 37 can be promptly consumed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 during the high frequency support mode is set to be longer than the interval of the game balls entering the second start port 208a (FIG. 102). . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suspension of the jackpot lottery from being interrupted and impairing the sense of rhythm of the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when a jackpot or a reach is won as a result of the jackpot lottery, a long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37. If a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game balls increases in the high frequency support mode, the period in which the number of game balls increases is long. Therefore, during the period in which the number of game balls increases, the player plays a game while expecting to win as many reach occurrences as possible. That is, according to the present embodiment, new value can be added to the occurrence of reach.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, The number of game balls on hand is reduced. If a small hit is won during this period and the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, the number of game balls held by the player will increase again. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the table is switched by winning a small hit during the period in which the number of game balls decreases. That is, according to the present embodiment, a new sense of expectation can be provided to the player during the high frequency support mode, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, two types of variable time table sets A and B are stored. However, the type of the variable time table set may be one, three or more. Is also good.

  Further, as another embodiment, during the high-frequency support mode, only the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 may be set with reference to the general-purpose unit table A or the general-purpose unit table B. Even with this configuration, the number of game balls held by the player can be increased or decreased during the high-frequency support mode, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

N. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, the following modifications are possible.

N1. Modification 1
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores the contents of the game effects or the effect elements constituting the game effects executed in the latest game, regardless of the presence / absence of the hold information, and executes the already-notified notice. In this case, the stored game effect or the content of the effect element constituting the game effect may be executed in the next game round. With such a configuration, in the state where there is no hold information, even if there is a new prize, in the game time related to the prize, the game effect or the game effect executed in the previous game time is formed. Since the effect element is executed, the game effect having the same content or the effect element constituting the game effect can be executed a plurality of times, so that the player can be given a sense of being already seen.

N2. Modification Example 2:
In the above-described embodiment, when the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element to be executed first may be ended and the effect element to be executed next may be started at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of being viewed.

N3. Modification 3:
In the above embodiment, after the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times is executed. However, the configuration may be such that before the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, a preliminary suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times is performed. . With this configuration, the player who has recognized the advance suggestion effect can be given a strong interest in the effect element to be executed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game effect, and to improve the interest.

N4. Modification 4:
In the above-described eighth and ninth embodiments, the configuration is such that the time length for which the open / close doors 208b and 308b maintain the open state is different for each type of the high frequency support mode. For each mode type, the number of times the doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state and the timing at which the doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state may be different. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the number of game balls entering the second starting port is different.

N5. Modification 5:
In the ninth embodiment, the main control device 60 is configured to be able to execute only one type of the third high-frequency support mode as the high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1, but the main control device 60 Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 can be executed.

  For example, in the ninth embodiment, the configuration may be such that the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds can be executed. In the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the opening / closing door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds, the game ball has a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting port unit 300. In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals, all of the four game balls enter the second starting port 308a, and eight game balls are paid out as prize balls. become. Therefore, the pitching rate in the case where the fourth high frequency support mode is being executed is 2.00. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of elation given to the player in the high frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds one. As a result, the intonation can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Even if the fourth high-frequency support mode can be executed, the above-described first overall pitching rate can be adjusted by adjusting the ratio of executing the first to fourth high-frequency support modes. The value of T1 and the second overall pitch rate T2 can be less than 1.

N6. Modification 6:
In the ninth embodiment, among the four game balls, one game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R11, and the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 arriving after the game ball GB1 are defined as the route R11. Instead of this configuration, one game ball GB1 is distributed to a predetermined route, and two game balls that arrive after the game ball GB1 are assigned to different routes (route R2 and route R12). A configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is distributed to a different route from the predetermined route, and one game ball GB1 is distributed to the predetermined route, and a predetermined number of four or more game balls arriving after the game ball GB1 are allocated to the predetermined route. It is good also as a structure which distributes to a route different from the route of. That is, one game ball GB1 may be distributed to a predetermined route, and N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that arrive after the game ball GB1 may be distributed to a route different from the predetermined route. Good.

  In place of the through gate 306 in the above-described ninth embodiment, a prize ball opening into which a game ball can enter, or a predetermined position, to which only one game ball GB1 distributed to the predetermined route can reach. It is good also as composition provided with an accessory. According to such a configuration, out of the (N + 1) game balls, only one game ball GB1 reaches the prize ball opening or the predetermined accessory, and the N game balls arrive after the game ball GB1. Can be prevented from reaching the prize ball opening or a predetermined accessory.

  Furthermore, by setting the value of N (the number of gaming balls distributed to a route different from the predetermined route) to a desired value at the time of designing the gaming machine, a game that reaches the prize ball opening or a predetermined accessory is set. The ratio of the spheres can be set to a desired ratio. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine can be improved, and diversification of gaming can be achieved.

N7. Modification 7:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, instead of the doors 208b and 308b, the state of the second starting ports 208a and 308a is set to a state where it is difficult to enter a game ball and a state where entry of a game ball is easy. Other mechanisms for transitioning between may be employed. For example, a so-called electric tulip may be employed as another mechanism in place of the doors 208b and 308b.

N8. Modification 8:
In the above-described eighth to thirteenth embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to other than 100%. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 99%, 60%, or the like. With such a configuration, the pitching rate in the high frequency support mode can be reduced. For example, in the case where the probability of winning is 1 in a case where the winning probability is 100% in the motorized character opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the motorized accessory opening lottery is 100. If it is set to less than%, the pitching rate in the high-frequency support mode can be set to less than 1.

  In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, when one game ball enters the second starting port 208a, 308a, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) paid out as prize balls is set to one or more. Any value other than two may be set. By doing so, the pitching rate in the high frequency support mode can be set to an arbitrary value. Further, when one game ball enters the second start-up opening 208a, 308a, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls (the number of prize balls) may be changed according to the game state. According to such a configuration, the pitching rate in the high-frequency support mode changes according to the gaming state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

N9. Modification 9:
In the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, the type of the high frequency support mode is set for each type of jackpot, but the trigger for executing the high frequency support mode and the type of the high frequency support mode are determined. Any other configuration can be adopted as the configuration. For example, a configuration to execute the high frequency support mode when the number of consecutive game times that do not win the jackpot lottery exceeds a predetermined number, or a high frequency support mode according to the number of consecutive game times that do not win the jackpot lottery A configuration for determining the type of the high frequency support mode is provided, and a random number counter for determining the type and the type of the high frequency support mode is provided. Depending on the value of the obtained random number counter, the presence or absence of the high frequency support mode and the high frequency support are provided. Configuration to determine the type of mode, configuration to determine whether or not to execute the high frequency support mode according to the type of stop symbol, configuration to determine the type of the high frequency support mode, high frequency when a specific reach effect is executed A configuration to execute the support mode, a configuration to determine the type of the high frequency support mode according to the type of the reach effect to be performed, and a hold of the starting port A configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is executed when the total number of game balls entered at the timing when the number is the upper limit exceeds the predetermined threshold, the number of reserved start openings becomes the upper limit It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the type of the high-frequency support mode is determined according to the total number of game balls that have entered at a certain timing.

N10. Modification 10:
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the launching rate and the execution ratio in each high-frequency support mode are set such that the first overall throwing rate T1 and the second overall throwing rate T2 are less than 1. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the throwing rate and the execution rate in each high-frequency support mode are set such that the first overall throwing rate T1 and the second overall throwing rate T2 become 1. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling of the player from excessively increasing.

N11. Modification 11:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which a special action device opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device or a game ball enters a specific region of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that wins a jackpot when a right is generated, a game machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on the activated line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as payout of medals is provided to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the game machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

  Further, in the above embodiment, some of the functions realized by software may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

O. Regarding the invention groups extracted from the above embodiments:
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof.

[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information is a target of the collation,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect element is determined,
In the effect execution means,
From the game time before the game time according to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the determined effect element is started,
A gaming machine characterized in that the determined effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content before a game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed.

  According to the feature A1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of having already seen (dejab) that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. . The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Further, according to the feature A1, even when the effect (for example, the pre-reading lamp is lit red) that directly suggests that the privilege is likely to be given is not executed, the effect element having the same content is performed. Can be realized in which attention is paid to whether or not is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, the player can always play a game with a high sense of expectation for the effect elements to be sequentially executed.

  Note that the game effect is executed by outputs from a plurality of hardware such as a speaker, a display device, a light emitting device, and a physically operating accessory included in the game machine. The effect element refers to a combination of outputs at a predetermined timing by the plurality of hardware that controls a game effect. For example, one effect element (for example, a cut-in notice effect, a reach effect, or the like) is configured by the speaker, the display device, and the light emitting device outputting each at a predetermined timing. A game effect is constituted by a plurality of effect elements.

  As described above, the rendering element is a combination of outputs at a predetermined timing by a plurality of hardware that controls a game rendering, and is configured by, for example, an output at a predetermined timing from a speaker, a display device, or a light emitting device. The effect element A and the effect element B in which the output from the speaker is deleted from the effect element are the same if the contents of the output from the display device and the light emitting device at a predetermined timing are the same. Will be included. When the gaming machine executes the effect element A after executing the effect element A, the game effect B does not include the sound (output from the speaker) with respect to the game effect A, but other hardware. Since the contents of the output from the (display device and the light emitting device) are the same, it is possible to give the player a sense of being viewed.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to Feature A1,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature A2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the expectation of the player is increased / decreased, and the expectation of the player is given by giving inflection to the expectation. Can be changed.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to Feature A2,
The control unit may control the plurality of times to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when a game round related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition ends. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of effect elements with the content of (1) as time elapses.

  According to the feature A3, the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases as time elapses, so that the player's expectation can be increased as time elapses.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, further comprising:
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
The control means includes:
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation accepting effect element including a content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation,
A gaming machine, wherein when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation accepting effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature A4, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Thus, it is possible to surely give a sense of sight.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The control means, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect indicating to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, A gaming machine characterized by being executed by a player.

  According to the feature A5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is executed. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and the background image changes to a mode different from a normal state. A background change announcement effect to be performed, a character announcement effect for causing a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect for emitting various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect for changing a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol row is fluctuated in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature A6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various effect elements, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for the various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Characteristic B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof.

[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element by the end of the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied While having the effect execution means execute multiple times with the same contents,
And causing the effect execution means to execute a suggestion effect indicating to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature B1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of demeaning that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. . The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given.

  Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can be made aware that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be executed a plurality of times. The player can be convinced that something has a special meaning.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein:
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature B2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the expectation of the player is increased / decreased, and the expectation of the player is given by giving an inflection to the expectation. Can be changed.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to Feature B2,
The control unit may control the plurality of times to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when a game round related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition ends. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of effect elements with the content of (1) as time elapses.

  According to the feature B3, the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases as time elapses, so that the player's expectation can be increased as time elapses.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3,
The determination unit determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the comparison. Things,
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means executes the plurality of executions from a game time before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine for starting execution of a rendering element to be performed.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling from a game time before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, further comprising:
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
The control means includes:
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation accepting effect element including a content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation,
A gaming machine, wherein when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation accepting effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature B5, since the operation accepting effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Thus, it is possible to surely give a sense of sight.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and the background image changes to a mode different from a normal state. A background change announcement effect to be performed, a character announcement effect for causing a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect for emitting various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect for changing a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol row is fluctuated in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various effect elements, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in various effect elements. Can be done.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
Determining means for determining a display duration time, which is a time required for one game round,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information is a target of the collation,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least two of a plurality of game times before the game time according to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In each of the game times, the effect execution means is configured to cause the effect execution means to execute an effect element having the same content that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times that can be determined by the determination means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C1, the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), so that the player feels that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given. The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  According to the feature C1, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect element having the same content that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times that can be determined by the determination means. Even if the display durations of the game times determined by the means are different, the effect element having the same content can be executed by the effect execution means in each game time.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein
The control means includes:
In the case where the length of the display duration of one game time in which the effect element having the same content is executed is a length in which the effect element having the same content can be executed a plurality of times, the same in the one game time A game machine which causes the effect executing means to execute the effect element having the content of (1) a plurality of times.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content (hereinafter, also referred to as an effect element for the already-visited notice), which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, more times. On the other hand, it is possible to strongly recognize the sense of sight. In addition, the number of times the effect element for the already-viewed notice is executed increases or decreases depending on the length of the display duration of one game time, so that the player's expectation can be inflected.

  Furthermore, the rendering element for the already-viewed notice is a rendering element that can be executed within the shortest display duration among the display durations that can be determined by the determination means, so that the time required for one execution is one. It is less than or equal to the display duration of the game times. Therefore, even if the already-presented notice effect element is executed once in one game time, a surplus time may be generated in the display continuation time. According to this gaming machine, when the length of the display continuation time of one game time is a length capable of executing the effect element for the already-viewed notice (the effect element of the same content) a plurality of times, Since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in one game time, the surplus time of the display continuation time can be minimized.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature C3, the player's expectation is increased or decreased by increasing / decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times. Can be changed.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to Feature C3,
The control unit may control the plurality of times to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when a game round related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition ends. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of effect elements with the content of (1) as time elapses.

  According to the feature C4, the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases as time elapses, so that the player's expectation can be increased as time elapses.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, further comprising:
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
The control means includes:
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation accepting effect element including a content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation,
A gaming machine, wherein when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation accepting effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature C5, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Thus, it is possible to surely give a sense of sight.

[Feature C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5,
The control means, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect indicating to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, A gaming machine characterized by being executed by a player.

  According to the feature C6, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is executed. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

[Feature C7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and the background image changes to a mode different from a normal state. A background change announcement effect to be performed, a character announcement effect for causing a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect for emitting various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect for changing a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol row is fluctuated in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various effect elements, and therefore, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information is a target of the collation,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Effect storage means for storing the contents of the game effect,
In a gaming machine equipped with
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The effect storage means stores the content in at least a part of the period of the game effect executed in the game time earlier than the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The control means is a game time after the game time in which the content of the game effect is stored, and in the game time before the game time according to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, A gaming machine wherein the stored content of the game effect in at least a part of the period is reproduced by the effect executing means.

  According to the feature D1, the content of the executed game effect in at least a part of the period is stored, and the content of the stored game effect in at least part of the period is reproduced. It is possible to give a feeling of being viewed (dejab) that the game effect has been executed a plurality of times. The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the bonus is given after the game effect of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the game effect is expected to be executed a plurality of times by the game effect of the same content. Every time it is executed, the player will pay attention to the game production with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the game effect to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Further, according to the feature D1, the content of the executed game effect is stored and reproduced, so that the player experiences the game effect of completely the same content. Therefore, it is easy to give the player a sense of being seen.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising:
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
The control means includes:
As the game effect, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A game machine characterized in that, when a game effect to be stored by the effect storage means is executed by a game effect portion, the operation accepting effect is not selected as the game effect.

  When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, the operation accepting effect may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature D2, since the operation accepting effect is not selected as the game effect to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation performed by the player. It is possible to surely give a sense of sight.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2,
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute a suggestion effect indicating to a player that a game effect of the same content has been reproduced, after the stored game effect has been reproduced. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature D3, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can recognize that the game effect of the same content is reproduced, and the game effect of the same content is reproduced. The player can be convinced that something has a special meaning.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information is a target of the collation,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Determining means for determining a display duration time, which is a time required for one game round,
Calculating the total time of the shortest display duration that can be determined by the determination unit as the display duration of a plurality of successive game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Calculating means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the calculation means calculates by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute an effect element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times in the total time, a plurality of times.

  According to the feature E1, the rendering element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), so that the player feels that the rendering element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given. The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Further, according to the feature E1, the control unit determines the effect element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times in the total time calculated by the calculation unit (the total time of the shortest display continuation time that can be determined by the determination unit). Since the effect execution means is executed a plurality of times, one effect element to be executed a plurality of times is not limited to one that can be ended within the display duration time required for one game time. That is, the effect element having the same content can be executed a plurality of times over a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. For example, it is also possible to execute one effect element to be executed a plurality of times across game times. Therefore, when selecting an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the effect element can be selected without considering the execution time of one time of the effect element.

  Furthermore, since the effect element of the same content that can be executed a plurality of times is executed a plurality of times within the total time of the shortest display duration times that can be determined by the determining means, the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times. Is less than or equal to the total display duration of each actual game. Therefore, when the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times over a plurality of successive game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is determined to be satisfied, a shortage of time occurs. By avoiding, it is possible to reliably execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein:
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature E2, by increasing / decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the expectation of the player is increased / decreased, and the expectation of the player is given, for example, by giving an inflection to the expectation. Can be changed.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to Feature E2,
The control unit may control the plurality of times to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when a game round related to the special information determined to have satisfied the predetermined condition is completed. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of effect elements with the content of (1) as time elapses.

  According to the feature E3, since the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising:
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
The control means includes:
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation accepting effect element including a content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation,
A gaming machine, wherein when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation accepting effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature E4, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Thus, it is possible to surely give a sense of sight.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The control means, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect indicating to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, A gaming machine characterized by being executed by a player.

  According to the feature E5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is not executed. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

[Feature E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and the background image changes to a mode different from a normal state. A background change announcement effect to be performed, a character announcement effect for causing a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect for emitting various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect for changing a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol row is fluctuated in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various effect elements. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
Determining means for determining a display duration time, which is a time required for one game round,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one of the game times before the game time according to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine for causing the effect execution means to execute an effect element that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game in a plurality of times with the same content.

According to the feature F1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a feeling that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab). .
The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, whether a privilege may be given.
Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times, and Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production elements with high expectation.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Further, according to the feature F1, at least one game time, the effect element that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game time is executed a plurality of times with the same content, so that the player has a sense of perception. Can be given in one game round.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature F2, by increasing / decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the expectation of the player is increased / decreased, and the expectation of the player is given, for example, by giving an inflection to the expectation. Can be changed.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to Feature F2,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit determines that the predetermined information has been satisfied and then determines that the predetermined information has been satisfied. A gaming machine wherein the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased as time elapses during a period until the round ends.

  According to the feature F3, the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases with time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F3,
The determination unit determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the comparison. Things,
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means executes the plurality of executions from a game time before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine for starting execution of a rendering element to be performed.

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling from a game time before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4,
The control means, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect indicating to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, A gaming machine characterized by being executed by a player.

  According to the feature F5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F5,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and the background image changes to a mode different from a normal state. A background change announcement effect to be performed, a character announcement effect for causing a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect for emitting various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect for changing a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol row is fluctuated in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature F6, it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various effect elements, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in various effect elements. Can be done.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information is a target of the collation,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Determining means for determining a display duration time, which is a time required for one game round,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determining means sets a display duration of a predetermined length for at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. To secure,
The control means performs the effect execution of the effect element having the same content in at least two game times among a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being executed by a means.

  According to the feature G1, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content in at least two game times in which the continuation time of the predetermined length is secured by the determining means. Since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of demeaning that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein
The determining means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least two of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. For each time, a display duration of a predetermined length is secured,
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute the effect element of the same content that can be executed in each game time in which the display duration of the predetermined length is secured by the determination means in each game time. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature G2, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute the effect element of the same content that can be executed in each game round in which the determination means secures the display duration of the predetermined length, so that the effect execution means It is possible to avoid that the time required to execute the same effect element is insufficient in each game time, and to surely execute the effect element having the same content in each game time.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least two of a plurality of game times before a plurality of game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is determined to be satisfied In the game times, to cause the effect execution means to execute the effect element of the same content,
The deciding means is that, for at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means has the same content. A gaming machine characterized by securing a display continuation time long enough to execute a performance element.

  According to the feature G3, the deciding unit secures a display continuation time that is long enough for the effect executing means to execute the effect element having the same content, and thus the time required for the effect executing means to execute the same effect element Can be avoided in each game time, and the effect element having the same content can be surely executed in each game time.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature G4, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the expectation of the player is increased / decreased, and the expectation of the player is given by giving an inflection to the expectation. Can be changed.

[Feature G5]
The gaming machine according to Feature G4,
The control unit may control the plurality of times to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when a game round related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition ends. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of effect elements with the content of (1) as time elapses.

  According to the feature G5, since the number of presentation elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G5, further comprising:
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
The control means includes:
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation accepting effect element including a content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation,
A gaming machine, wherein when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation accepting effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature G6, since the operation accepting effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Thus, it is possible to surely give a sense of sight.

[Feature G7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G6,
The control means, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect indicating to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, A gaming machine characterized by being executed by a player.

  According to the feature G7, the suggestion effect is caused to be executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

[Feature G8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G7,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and the background image changes to a mode different from a normal state. A background change announcement effect to be performed, a character announcement effect for causing a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect for emitting various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect for changing a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol row is fluctuated in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature G8, it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various effect elements. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Time acquisition means for acquiring time information;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
As the effect element, to cause the effect execution means to execute a time-linked effect element that is continuously executed over time based on the time information,
The case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the execution of the time-linked effect element is started by the time the game based on the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. In this case, a plurality of the time-linked effect elements to be executed in at least a part of the time are assigned to the effect execution unit until the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. A gaming machine characterized by being executed twice.

  According to the feature H1, the time-linked effect element that is executed at least in part of the period is executed a plurality of times, so that an effect with a new interest can be provided to the player. Further, since the time-linked effect element that is executed in at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, the player feels that the time-linked effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab) Can be given.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, the time-linked effect element is executed with the expectation that the time-effect element is executed a plurality of times. At any time, he will always pay attention to the time-linked production elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention of the player to the time-linked effect element that is executed based on the time information. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  If a plurality of gaming machines having the feature H1 are installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machine satisfying the predetermined condition and the gaming machine not satisfying the predetermined condition have the same time-linked effect element from the same time. Is started, there is a time difference (shift) in the time-linked effect element to be executed. Therefore, superiority can be given to a player playing a game with a gaming machine satisfying a predetermined condition.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein
The control means sets a specific time position of the time-linked effect element having a predetermined time length as a start position when the time-linked effect element is executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature H2, the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times with the specific time position as the start position, so that the player is strongly given to the part after the specific time position of the time-linked effect element. Visual sensation can be recognized.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to Feature H2,
The determination unit determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the comparison. Things,
The control means is a game time whose execution is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a game time before the game time according to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A timing of starting at least two of the game rounds as an opportunity, causing the performance execution means to execute the time-linked production element with the specific temporal position as a start position. Machine.

  According to the feature H3, by synchronizing the timing of the start of each time-linked effect element executed a plurality of times with the timing of the start of the game round, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to Feature H2 or Feature 3,
The control means stores, as the specific time position, a time position of the time-linked effect element that is executed at a timing at which a game round is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  If a specific time position is set at the end of the time-linked production element, if the time-linked production element starts from a specific time position, the time-linked production element corresponding to the specific time position will be May not be executed at the timing of the start of the first game time of at least two game times. In this case, the time-linked effect element that has been executed as a continuous series of flows until the first game round is started is suddenly interrupted at the start timing of the first game round, and is executed once. The time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific time position that is not specified.

  According to the feature H4, a time-linked effect executed at the timing when the first game time of the at least two game times is started, that is, the game time after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The temporal position of the element is stored as a specific temporal position, and the stored specific temporal position is used as the start position of the second or later time-linked production element of the plurality of executions. The temporal position once executed as a continuous series of flows can be set as the start position of the second or later time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, the time-linked effect element that has been executed as a continuous series of flows until the first game round is started is prevented from being suddenly interrupted at the start of the first game round, and is executed once. It is possible to avoid starting and executing the time-linked production element from a specific temporal position that is not present.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4,
The control means includes:
As the effect element, it is further possible to cause the effect execution means to execute a non-time-linked effect element that is executed based on the time information,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the non-time-linked effect element is being executed together with the time-linked effect element, the time-linked effect that is executed in at least a part of the period And causing the effect execution unit to execute the element and the non-time-linked effect element a plurality of times before the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H5, in addition to the time-linked effect element, the non-time-linked effect element is also executed a plurality of times, so that the player can be given a stronger sense of sight.

[Feature H6]
The gaming machine according to Feature H5,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of the non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature 6, by increasing / decreasing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times, the expectation of the player is increased / decreased, and the expectation of the player is increased. You can make a change.

[Feature H7]
The gaming machine according to Feature H6,
The control unit may execute the plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when a game round related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of non-time-linked effect elements is increased over time.

  According to the feature H7, the number of non-time-linked effect elements, which are one of the effect elements for which the player recognizes the already-viewed feeling, increases with the passage of time. Can be increased.

[Feature H8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H7,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
The control means includes:
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation accepting effect element including a content indicating that the player has accepted the input operation,
A gaming machine, wherein when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation accepting effect element is not selected as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature H8, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to surely give the person a sense of sight.

[Feature H9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H8,
The control means, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect indicating to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, A gaming machine characterized by being executed by a player.

  According to the feature H9, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

[Feature H10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H9,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and the background image changes to a mode different from a normal state. A background change announcement effect to be performed, a character announcement effect for causing a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect for emitting various lamps in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect for changing a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol row is fluctuated in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature H10, since it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various effect elements, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Characteristic I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transmitted to the effect execution means until the game time pertaining to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. To be executed multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute a first effect mode including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When the condition is satisfied, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution means.
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
When the second effect mode is executed when the operation receiving effect element is executed by the effect execution means for the first time,
After causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode, the second effect mode is executed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. Let the production execution means execute,
When the second effect mode is not executed when the first operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means,
After causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode, the second effect mode is executed regardless of whether or not the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. A gaming machine, wherein the effect is not executed by the effect executing means.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature I1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation accepting effect element, the second operation accepting effect element in the second or later operation accepting effect element is executed. Is performed, while, if the second effect mode is not executed in the first operation accepting effect element, the second effect mode is not executed in the second and subsequent operation accepting effect elements, Even when the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation accepting effect element executed for the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of having already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein:
The control means includes:
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution unit when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
The second effect mode is executed when the effect execution element is executed by the effect execution element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition,
The second effect mode is executed when the effect execution element is executed by the effect execution element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means. Later, if the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature I2, when the operation mode of the input operation performed by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. . Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2,
The control means includes:
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation accepting effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In some cases, the player performs an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the player has the same content. Even if the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player does not easily feel the sense of having already seen the operation accepting effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature I3, when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means. Can be.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, further comprising:
Changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to a mode when the input operation by the player is received,
The control means includes:
In the case where the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the second effect mode is to be executed by the effect execution means,
Controlling the change means to change a mode of the operation receiving means to a mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I4, since the mode of the operation accepting means changes, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game. Further, it is possible to give persuasive power that the second effect mode is executed even though the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition.

[Feature I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special execution information determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, before the special information is subjected to the collation, the effect execution means A game machine for starting execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature I5, the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the matching. , The player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling.

[Feature I6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I5,
The control means, after the operation reception effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature I6, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is displayed. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transmitted to the effect execution means until the game time pertaining to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. To be executed multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute a first effect mode including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When the condition is satisfied, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, a third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes is performed. The effect execution means to execute,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
When the second effect mode is executed when the operation receiving effect element is executed by the effect execution means for the first time,
After causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode, the second effect mode is executed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. Let the production execution means execute,
When the third effect mode is executed when the operation receiving effect element is executed by the effect execution means for the first time,
After the first performance mode is executed by the performance execution unit, the third performance mode is set to the third performance mode regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect is executed by an effect executing means.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature J1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation performed by the player, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation accepting effect element, the second effect mode is executed in the second and subsequent operation accepting effect elements. Is performed, while on the other hand, when the third effect mode is executed in the first operation accepting effect element, the third effect mode is executed in the second and subsequent operation accepting effect elements, Even when the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation accepting effect element executed for the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of having already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein
The control means includes:
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
In a case where the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, causing the operation execution means to execute the second effect mode triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition;
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third performance mode is caused to be executed by the performance execution unit when the predetermined time has elapsed,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
The second effect mode is executed when the effect execution element is executed by the effect execution element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition,
The second effect mode is executed when the effect execution element is executed by the effect execution element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means when the predetermined time has elapsed,
This is a case where the third effect mode is executed when the first operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed by the effect execution means when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition,
This is a case where the third effect mode is executed when the first operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed by the effect execution means when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature J2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third operation mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since the effect mode is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. be able to. Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed, so that the game is given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to Feature J1 or Feature J2,
The control means includes:
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation accepting effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In some cases, the player performs an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the player has the same content. Even if the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player does not easily feel the sense of having already seen the operation accepting effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature J3, when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means. Can be.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J3, further comprising:
Changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to a mode when the input operation by the player is received,
The control means includes:
In the case where the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the second effect mode is to be executed by the effect execution means,
Controlling the change means to change a mode of the operation receiving means to a mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature J4, since the mode of the operation accepting means changes, unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition even though the operation mode does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition. The performance of the second effect can be persuasive.

[Feature J5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J4,
The determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special execution information determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, before the special information is subjected to the collation, the effect execution means A game machine for starting execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature J5, the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the matching, so that the plurality of game times , The player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling.
[Feature J6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J5,
The control means, after the operation reception effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature J6, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is executed. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transmitted to the effect execution means until the game time pertaining to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. To be executed multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute a first effect mode including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode in both cases where the condition is satisfied and in the case where the condition is not satisfied.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature K1, the second effect mode is executed after the first effect mode is executed, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. Even in this case, the contents of the operation acceptance effect elements executed in the first and second times can be made the same.
Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being viewed (dejab) that the operation accepting effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to Feature K1, wherein
The control means includes:
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
In a case where the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, causing the operation execution means to execute the second effect mode triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition;
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second performance mode is executed by the performance execution unit when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature K2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. . Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to Feature K1 or Feature K2,
The control means includes:
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation accepting effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In some cases, the player performs an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the player has the same content. Even if the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player does not easily feel the sense of having already seen the operation accepting effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature K3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in feeling the already-viewed feeling. Can be.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K3, further comprising:
Changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to a mode when the input operation by the player is received,
The control means includes:
In the case where the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the second effect mode is to be executed by the effect execution means,
Controlling the change means to change a mode of the operation receiving means to a mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K4, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition even though the operation mode does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition. The performance of the second effect can be persuasive.

[Feature K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4,
The determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special execution information determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, before the special information is subjected to the collation, the effect execution means A game machine for starting execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature K5, the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the matching, so that the plurality of game times , The player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling.
[Feature K6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K5,
The control means, after the operation reception effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature K6, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transmitted to the effect execution means until the game time pertaining to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. To be executed multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
A selection screen including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and allowing the player to select one of a plurality of options, the operation of the input operation received by the operation receiving unit Each time the mode satisfies a predetermined operation condition, the selection state is switched to a selection screen which is displayed on the effect execution means,
And causing the effect execution means to execute an effect mode corresponding to the option selected at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
Displaying the same selection screen as the selection screen displayed for the first time on the effect execution means,
A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute the same effect as the effect corresponding to the option selected for the first time at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature L1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, in the operation accepting effect element executed for the second time or later, the effect state identical to the effecting mode executed in the first operation accepting effect element is obtained. Since the execution is performed, even if the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation accepting effect element executed for the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of having already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein:
The gaming machine, wherein the selection screen is the same before and after the selection state is switched.

  According to the feature L2, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the same effect mode is executed from the same mode selection screen. Can be.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to Feature L1 or Feature L2,
The control means includes:
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation accepting effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In some cases, the player performs an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the player has the same content. Even if the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player does not easily feel the sense of having already seen the operation accepting effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature L3, when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means. Can be.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L3,
The determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special execution information determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, before the special information is subjected to the collation, the effect execution means A game machine for starting execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature L4, the execution of the effect element that is to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the matching. , The player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L4,
The control means, after the operation reception effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature L5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 5 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature M1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transmitted to the effect execution means until the game time pertaining to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. To be executed multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
A selection screen including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and allowing the player to select one of a plurality of presentation modes from among a plurality of presentation modes, wherein the selection state switches over time. Is displayed on the effect execution means,
Regardless of whether the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition or does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition, one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes. State, and causes the effect execution means to execute the selected effect mode,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
Displaying the same selection screen as the selection screen displayed for the first time on the effect execution means,
Regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or the case where the operation condition is not satisfied, the same effect mode as the first effect mode is selected, and the selected effect is selected. A gaming machine wherein the effect is executed by the effect executing means.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature M1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, in the operation acceptance effect element executed for the second time or later, the same effect state as the effect mode executed in the first operation acceptance effect element is performed. Since the operation acceptance effect element is selected and executed, even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed for the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of having already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein
The control means includes:
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
In a case where the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, a state in which one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition. ,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, a state where one of the plurality of effect modes is selected from the plurality of effect modes when the predetermined time has elapsed. And
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same effect mode as the first effect mode selected at the time of the operation mode satisfying the operation condition is selected. State
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same effect mode as the first effect mode selected at the time when the predetermined time has elapsed is selected. A gaming machine characterized by being a thing.

  According to the feature M2, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one of the plurality of effect modes is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition. Since the player is in the selected state, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, one of the plurality of production modes is triggered by the lapse of the predetermined time. Can be selected.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
The control means includes:
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation accepting effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In some cases, the player performs an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the player has the same content. Even if the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player does not easily feel the sense of having already seen the operation accepting effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature M3, when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means. Can be.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M3,
The determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special execution information determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, before the special information is subjected to the collation, the effect execution means A game machine for starting execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature M4, the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the matching. , The player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M4,
The control means, after the operation reception effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature M5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and that the effect element of the same content is executed. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 6 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transmitted to the effect execution means until the game time pertaining to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. To be executed multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
A first effect mode in which the effect effecting means includes a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, and causes the effect effecting means to display predetermined parameters that change in a certain direction over time. Let
A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode after the parameter satisfies a predetermined parameter condition.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature N1, after the first effect mode is executed, the parameters satisfy the predetermined parameter condition regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, and the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, even when the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation accepting effect element executed for the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of having already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the already-viewed feeling has an expectation that there is a special meaning to the already-viewed feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element is executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, he will pay attention to the production element with high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect element that is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to Feature N1,
The control means, when the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation reception means satisfies a predetermined operation condition, causes the effect execution means to execute a speed changing process of changing a changing speed of the parameter. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature N2, the player operates the operation receiving means so that the operation mode of the input operation satisfies the predetermined operation condition in order to change the changing speed of the parameter. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to Feature N2,
When the control unit changes the parameter in a direction to decrease with time, the decreasing speed of the parameter decreases as the number of the input operations accepted by the operation receiving unit per unit time increases. A game machine for causing the effect executing means to execute the speed change processing.

  According to the feature N3, the player operates the operation receiving unit so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in an attempt to reduce the parameter decreasing speed. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine according to Feature N2,
When the control unit changes the parameter in a direction that increases with the passage of time, the increasing speed of the parameter increases as the number of the input operations accepted by the operation receiving unit per unit time increases. A game machine for causing the effect executing means to execute the speed change processing.

  According to the feature N4, the player operates the operation receiving means so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in an attempt to increase the parameter increasing speed. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N4,
The control means includes:
When causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element, the process of changing the parameter is stored,
A game machine characterized in that when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means for the second time or later, the effect changing means reproduces the process of changing the stored parameters.

  According to the feature N5, in the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times, the process of changing the parameter becomes the same, so that the player can be given a stronger sense of already-viewed.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N5, further comprising:
Changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to a mode when the input operation by the player is received,
The control means includes:
When the first operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means, the process of changing the mode of the operation accepting means when the input operation is accepted is stored,
A process of causing the changing means to reproduce the stored process of changing the mode of the operation receiving means when the operation receiving effect element is executed by the effect executing means for the second and subsequent times. Machine.

  According to the feature N6, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, unexpectedness can be given to the game. Furthermore, in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements, the process of changing the mode of the operation acceptance means in the first operation acceptance effect element is reproduced, so that the player can be provided with a stronger sense of sight.

[Feature N7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N6,
The determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special execution information determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, before the special information is subjected to the collation, the effect execution means A game machine for starting execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature N7, the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. , The player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling.

[Feature N8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N7,
The control means, after the operation reception effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature N8, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible for the player to recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is executed. The player can be convinced that the execution of the plural times has a special meaning.

<Character O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature O1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transmitted to the effect execution means until the game time pertaining to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. To be executed multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute a first effect mode including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When the condition is satisfied, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution means.
In the case where the second effect mode has been executed in all of the operation accepting effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, or in the case where the second effect mode has been executed in all of the operation accepting effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. If not executed,
A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute a suggestion effect indicating to a player that the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature O1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content Can be given to the player as if the effect element has been executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player is notified that the effect element having the same contents has been executed a plurality of times. In addition to being able to recognize, the player can be convinced that the execution of the operation accepting and presentation element having the same content has a special meaning.

  Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggestion effect after the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, each time the operation accepting effect element is executed, expecting the suggestive effect to be executed, By performing the same input operation and operating the operation accepting means so that the operation accepting effect mode is executed with the same contents, the occurrence of a suggested effect is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed can be appropriately increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the control unit executes the second effect mode on the effect execution unit when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature O2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second production mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2,
The control means includes:
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation accepting effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In some cases, the player performs an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the player has the same content. Even if the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player does not easily feel the sense of having already seen the operation accepting effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature O3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in seeing the game. Can be.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O3,
The determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special execution information determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, before the special information is subjected to the collation, the effect execution means A game machine for starting execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature O4, the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the matching. , The player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling.

<Character P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature P1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the obtained information storage means, and a matching means for checking whether or not predetermined privilege grant information matches,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the comparison of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on at least one of the information included in the special information,
Effect execution means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
An operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transmitted to the effect execution means until the game time pertaining to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. To be executed multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute a first effect mode including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When the condition is satisfied, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means,
If the operation mode does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, a third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes Is executed by the effect execution means,
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation accepting effect elements executed a plurality of times, or in the case where the third effect mode is executed in all of the operation accepting effect elements executed plural times. in case of,
A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute a suggestion effect indicating to a player that the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature P1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content Can be given to the player as if the effect element has been executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player is notified that the effect element having the same contents has been executed a plurality of times. In addition to being able to recognize, the player can be convinced that the execution of the operation accepting and presentation element having the same content has a special meaning.

Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggested effect after the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, each time the operation accepting effect element is executed, expecting the suggested effect to be executed, By performing the same input operation and operating the operation accepting means so that the operation accepting effect mode is executed with the same contents, the occurrence of a suggested effect is expected.
Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to Feature P1, wherein
The control means includes:
In a case where the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, causing the operation execution means to execute the second effect mode triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition;
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed by the effect execution means when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature P2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. . Furthermore, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed, so that it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to Feature P1 or Feature P2,
The control means includes:
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation accepting effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In some cases, the player performs an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the player has the same content. Even if the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player does not easily feel the sense of having already seen the operation accepting effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature P3, when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means. Can be.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P3,
The determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special execution information determined that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, before the special information is subjected to the collation, the effect execution means A game machine for starting execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature P4, the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the matching. , The player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the already-viewed feeling.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth and ninth embodiments.

[Feature Q1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entry portion (the second starting port 208a in the eighth embodiment, the second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which a launched game ball can enter, and
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eighth embodiment, through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which the fired game balls can pass,
The state of the entering ball section is defined as a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entering ball section, and a state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball into the entering ball section. State transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the eighth embodiment, opening / closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning to a second state which is a state,
Distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the eighth embodiment, first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes;
A first route (route R1 in the eighth embodiment, route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured to allow the sorted game balls to pass through the passing portion;
A second route (route R2 in the eighth embodiment, route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
With
The distributing means includes:
While arriving gaming balls are distributed to the first route,
Distributing game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first path to the second path,
A game ball that arrives after a game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first path and the second path are such that the sorted game balls can enter the ball entry section when the ball entry section is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being constituted.

  According to the feature Q1, the game balls allocated to the first route (hereinafter, also referred to as first game balls) can pass through the passing portion, and the entering ball portion is in the second state. In some cases, it is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, a game ball that arrives after the first game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a second game ball) is distributed to the second route, so that it cannot pass through the passing portion and enters the ball. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first and second game balls enters the ball entry portion. Whether or not the first ball and the second game ball each reach the ball entry portion depends on whether or not the ball entry portion is in the second state. Therefore, the game that enters the ball entry portion while the number of the game balls that may pass through the passage portion among the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) is set to one. Since the number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the entering ball portion, diversification of games can be achieved.

  For example, the length of time for which the entering ball section maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, the number of times the entering ball section transitions from the first state to the second state, In a case where the timing at which the entering ball section transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled so as to be different for each mode, the entering ball section of the first and second game balls is used. Since the number of game balls entering the game can be made different for each mode, it is possible to diversify the games.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to Feature Q1, wherein
Lottery executing means (processing shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when a game ball has passed through the passing section;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery (the processing shown in FIGS. 76, 77 and 83);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature Q2, the control unit controls the state transition unit based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing unit. Since the second game ball does not pass through the passing portion, the control means sets the first and second game balls in a situation where the game ball is continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval by the firing means. Whether the state of the entering ball portion at the timing when each of them reaches the entering ball portion is set to the first state or the second state, that is, each of the first and second game balls is set to the entering ball portion. Whether to enter the ball is determined based on the result of the lottery executed when the first game ball has passed through the passing portion and the mode of control of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) is allowed to enter the ball entry section. This can be realized by a series of controls triggered by passing through the passage section.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine according to Feature Q2,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first and second high frequency support modes in the eighth embodiment, first to third high frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means. And
For each of the control modes, a time length for maintaining the second state after the entering ball section transitions from the first state to the second state, after the game ball passes through the passing section. The time length until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entry unit transitions from the first state to the second state, A gaming machine, wherein at least one of timings at which the entry section transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

  According to the feature Q3, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) can be made different for each control mode. Because it is possible, the game can be diversified.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to feature Q2 or feature Q3,
Display means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means (general drawing unit 38)
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means,
A gaming machine, wherein the time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion.

  According to the feature Q4, the display unit can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the first game ball, which has passed through the passing part and triggered the lottery, reaches the ball entry part. . The control means starts the control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, so that the first game ball which has passed through the passing section and which has triggered the lottery is entered into the ball entry section. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing of reaching.

  For example, the control unit can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passing unit reaches the ball entry unit and the ball entry unit is in the second state at the timing.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to feature Q4,
After the game ball has passed through the passing section, the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passed through the passing section is displayed by the display means, and the ball entry section is in the second state. The time before the transition to
A gaming machine, wherein the time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion.

  According to the feature Q5, the control means can realize a control mode in which the first ball entered the ball is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball having passed the passage reaches the ball entry portion. Become.

[Feature Q6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features Q2 to Q5,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means, the game balls distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion reach the ball input portion. At the timing, the entering ball portion is in the second state, and at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second route reaches the entering ball portion, the entering ball portion is in the first state. Control mode (first high frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment),
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means, the game balls distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion reach the ball input portion. At the timing, the entering ball portion is in the second state, and at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second route reaches the entering ball portion, the entering ball portion is in the second state. Control mode (second high frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature Q6, the first game ball enters the ball entry section, but the second game ball does not enter the ball entry section, the first control mode, and the first game ball and the second game ball do not enter the ball entry section. Since the second control mode in which both of the game balls enter the ball entry section can be realized, inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature Q7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features Q1 to Q5,
The distributing means includes:
While arriving one game ball is distributed to the first route (the route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route (the routes R2 and R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine, wherein one gaming ball arriving after N game balls distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route.

  According to the feature Q7, since one game ball is distributed to the first route and N game balls are distributed to the second route, each of the (N + 1) game balls is entered. The control as to whether or not to enter the section can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing section. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game. For example, if the number of game balls entering the ball entry section of the (N + 1) game balls is made different for each control mode, various control of the number of game balls entering the ball entry section will be different. Mode can be realized.

[Feature Q8]
The gaming machine according to feature Q7,
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball through the passing portion,
Display means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery,
With
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is formed by the incoming ball. At the timing of reaching the part, the entering ball part is in the second state, and at all the timings at which the N game balls distributed to the second route reach the entering part, A first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) which is a first state;
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is formed by the incoming ball. At the timing when the ball reaches the ball, at which the ball is in the second state, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second route reaches the ball. A second control mode (the second high-frequency support mode and the third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball-in section is in the second state;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature Q8, the first control mode is such that the first game ball enters the ball entry section, but the N game balls do not enter the ball entry section, and the first game ball enters the ball entry section. The second control mode in which at least one of the N game balls entering the ball enters the ball entry section can realize the second control mode, so that the game can be given inflection, It is possible to improve the interest of the people.

[Feature Q9]
The gaming machine according to feature Q7 or feature Q8,
The second route is configured by N routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distributing means includes an alternating distributing mechanism (a first alternating distributing mechanism 304 and a second alternating distributing mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for alternately distributing a game ball to one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

  According to the feature Q9, the function of distributing one arrived game ball to the first route and distributing N game balls arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route is provided by an electronic function. Compared to a configuration realized using control or the like, the configuration can be realized with a simple configuration. In addition, as a configuration for realizing the function using electronic control or the like, for example, the number of reached game balls is measured using a counter or the like, and a game ball that is driven by an electric force is used. Can be cited.

[Feature Q10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features Q1 to Q9,
A third route (route R2 in Examples 1 and 4 in FIG. 84) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
The distributing means includes:
While arriving one game ball is distributed to the first route (the route R11 in the example 1 of FIG. 84, the route R111 in the example 4 of FIG. 84),
84. At least one of the plurality of game balls reaching after the game ball distributed to the first route is transferred to the second route (the route R12 in the example 1 of FIG. 84 and the route R in the example 4 of FIG. 84). R12 and route R112),
Distributing at least one of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route to the third route,
It is configured to distribute a game ball distributed to the second route and one game ball arrived after the game ball distributed to the third route to the first route,
The third path is configured such that the sorted game balls cannot enter the ball entry section even when the ball entry section is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature Q10, since the distributed game ball is provided with the third route configured so as not to be able to enter the ball entry portion, the game can be further diversified. For example, by configuring so that a large number of game balls are distributed to the third route, the number of game balls entering the ball entry section can be reduced.

<Characteristic R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature R1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entry portion (a second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which a launched game ball can enter,
Execution means (main control device 60) for executing a ball entry assist mode (high-frequency support mode) for assisting entry of game balls into the entry section;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out game balls as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section;
A gaming machine comprising:
The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means is defined as a throwing rate. If you do
The execution means,
N types (n is an integer of 2 or more) of ball entry assist modes having different throwing rates can be executed,
As one of the n types of ball entry assist modes, at least the game ball decreasing mode (the first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is less than 1, and the ball exit rate are And more than one game ball increasing mode (third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment).
The exit rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entry assist mode is executed is defined as Mi,
When the ratio of the execution of the i-th ball entry assist mode to the execution of the ball entry assist mode is defined as Pi,
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized by being configured to satisfy the following.

  According to the feature R1, as one mode of the ball entry assist mode, although the game ball increasing mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1 can be executed, the total ball exit when the ball entry assist mode is executed. Since the rate is less than 1, it is possible to provide the player with an elation sensation in the game ball increasing mode, and to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling of the player. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest in the game.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to Feature R1, wherein
The gaming machine, wherein the execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the game ball increasing modes (the third high-frequency support mode and the fourth high-frequency support mode in Modification Example 5) having different throwing rates. .

  According to the feature R2, since a plurality of types of game ball increasing modes having different throwing rates can be executed, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of elation given to the player in the game ball increasing mode. As a result, the intonation can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature R3]
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
A passing portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which the launched game ball can pass;
The state of the entering ball section is defined as a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entering ball section, and a state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball into the entering ball section. State transition means (open / close door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning to the second state, which is a state,
Lottery executing means (processing shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when a game ball has passed through the passing section;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery (the processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 83);
Distributing means for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes (the first alternating distributing mechanism 304 and the second alternating distributing mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment);
The sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion, and can enter the entering ball portion when the entering ball portion is in the second state. A first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured as follows:
In such a manner that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion and can enter the entering ball portion when the entering ball portion is in the second state. A second route (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured as described above,
With
The distributing means includes:
While allocating one reached game ball to the first route,
N game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route,
One game ball that arrives after the N game balls distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route;
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means. The game ball increasing mode is such that one of the plurality of control modes is executed by the control means. Is the mode that is realized,
The gaming machine, wherein the game ball decreasing mode is a mode realized by executing another control mode of the plurality of control modes by the control means.

  According to the feature R3, one game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a first game ball) allocated to the first route can pass through the passing portion, and the entering ball portion has the second ball. In this state, it is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the N game balls that arrive after the first game ball are distributed to the second route, so that it is impossible to pass through the passing portion and the entering ball portion is in the second state. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball. That is, of the first game ball and the N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passage portion, and the first game ball and the N game balls can be used as the first game ball and the N game balls, respectively. Whether or not a game ball enters the ball entry portion is determined by the timing at which each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the ball entry portion. It depends on whether it is in the state or not.

  Since the N game balls that arrive after the first game ball do not pass through the passage section, the control means determines that the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval by the firing means. Whether the state of the first entering ball at the timing when each of the first gaming ball and the N number of gaming balls reaches the entering ball portion is the first state or the second state, That is, whether or not each of the first game ball and the N game balls is made to enter the ball entry portion is executed when the first game ball passes through the passage portion. It is determined based on the result of the lottery and the control mode of the state transition means set for each control mode. Therefore, the control as to whether or not each of the (N + 1) game balls enters the ball entry portion is triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passage portion. This can be realized by a series of controls.

  Further, according to the feature R3, the time length of the entering ball portion maintaining the second state after the transition from the first state to the second state, and the entering ball portion moving from the first state to the second state. If the number of transitions to the state and the timing at which the entry part transitions from the first state to the second state are controlled to be different for each control mode, (N + 1) game balls The number of game balls entering the ball entry section can be made different for each control mode, so that the exit rate in each control mode can be set to a different value.

[Feature R4]
The gaming machine according to feature R3,
The control means includes, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is formed by the incoming ball. At the timing of reaching the part, the entering ball part is in the second state, and at all the timings at which the N game balls distributed to the second route reach the entering part, A first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) which is a first state;
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is formed by the incoming ball. At the timing when the ball reaches the ball, at which the ball is in the second state, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second route reaches the ball. A second control mode (the second high-frequency support mode and the third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball-in section is in the second state;
Has,
The game ball increasing mode is a mode realized by the control unit executing the second control mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the game ball decreasing mode is a mode realized by the control unit executing the first control mode.

  According to the feature R4, the first game ball enters the ball entry portion, but the N game balls do not enter the ball entry portion, and the first game ball enters the ball entry portion. At least one game ball out of the N game balls can realize a game ball increase mode in which the ball enters the ball entry section, so that the game can be given inflection and the interest of the game can be increased. Improvement can be achieved.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81);
Distributing means for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes (the first alternating distributing mechanism 304 and the second alternating distributing mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment);
With
The distributing means includes:
While arriving one game ball is distributed to the first route (the route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route are transferred to a second route (a route in the ninth embodiment) that is different from the first route. R2 and route R12),
A gaming machine, wherein one gaming ball arriving after N game balls distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route.

  According to the feature S1, one game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a first game ball) among the (N + 1) game balls is distributed to the first route, and N reaches after the first game ball. Since the plurality of game balls can be distributed to the second route, diversification of the game can be achieved by effectively using the first route and the second route, and the interest of the game can be improved. be able to.

  For example, when a configuration is provided in which a ball entry portion or a predetermined accessory in which a game ball can enter is provided at a position where only the first game ball allocated to the first route can reach, (N + 1) Of the plurality of game balls, only the first game ball reaches the entering ball portion or a predetermined accessory, and the N game balls reaching after the first game ball are used as the entering ball portion or the predetermined accessory. It is possible not to reach. Further, when the gaming machine is designed, the value of N (the number of gaming balls distributed to the second route) is set to a desired value, so that the proportion of the gaming balls reaching the entering part or a predetermined accessory is reduced. It can be set to a desired ratio. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine can be improved, and diversification of gaming can be achieved.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
A passage portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which a game ball can pass;
The first route is configured such that game balls distributed to the first route can pass through the passing portion,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second route is configured such that game balls distributed to the second route cannot pass through the passing portion.

  According to the feature S2, of the (N + 1) game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion. Therefore, in a case where the predetermined processing is executed in response to the passing of the game ball through the passing portion, the predetermined processing is performed by one every time (N + 1) game balls reach the distribution means. It can be executed at the rate of the number of times.

  For example, in a case where a predetermined lottery is executed in response to a game ball passing through the passing section, the predetermined lottery is performed every time (N + 1) game balls reach the distribution means. It will be executed at the rate of the number of times. Further, at the time of designing the gaming machine, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to the second route) to a desired value, the frequency at which the predetermined lottery is executed is set to a desired frequency. be able to. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine can be improved, and diversification of gaming can be achieved.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S2,
A ball entry portion (a second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which a launched game ball can enter,
The state of the entering ball section is defined as a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entering ball section, and a state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball into the entering ball section. State transition means (open / close door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning to the second state, which is a state,
With
The first path and the second path are such that the sorted game balls can enter the ball entry section when the ball entry section is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being constituted.

  According to the feature S3, the first game ball distributed to the first route can pass through the passing portion, and when the entering ball portion is in the second state, the corresponding entering ball portion It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the N game balls that arrive after the first game ball are distributed to the second route, so that it is impossible to pass through the passing portion and the entering ball portion is in the second state. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball. That is, of the first game ball and the N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passage portion, and the first game ball and the N game balls can be used as the first game ball and the N game balls, respectively. Whether or not a game ball enters the ball entry portion is determined by the timing at which each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the ball entry portion. It depends on whether it is in the state or not. Therefore, while the number of the game balls that may pass through the passing portion among the (N + 1) game balls is set to one, the number of the game balls entering the ball entry portion is changed to the state of the ball entry portion. Since the game can be changed depending on the game, the game can be diversified.

  For example, the length of time for which the entering ball section maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, the number of times the entering ball section transitions from the first state to the second state, In the case where the timing at which the entering ball section transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled so as to be different for each mode, the entering ball section of the (N + 1) game balls is Since the number of entering game balls can be made different for each mode, diversification of games can be achieved.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine according to feature S3,
Lottery executing means (processing shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when a game ball has passed through the passing section;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery (the processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 83);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature S4, the control unit controls the state transition unit based on a result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing unit. Since the N game balls that arrive after the first game ball do not pass through the passage section, the control means determines that the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval by the firing means. Whether the state of the first entering ball at the timing when each of the first gaming ball and the N number of gaming balls reaches the entering ball portion is the first state or the second state, That is, whether or not each of the first game ball and the N game balls is made to enter the ball entry portion is executed when the first game ball passes through the passage portion. It is determined according to the result of the lottery and the mode of control of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, the control as to whether or not each of the (N + 1) game balls enters the ball entry portion is triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passage portion. This can be realized by a series of controls.

[Feature S5]
The gaming machine according to feature S4,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first to third high frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means,
For each of the control modes, a time length for maintaining the second state after the entering ball section transitions from the first state to the second state, after the game ball passes through the passing section. The time length until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entry unit transitions from the first state to the second state, A gaming machine, wherein at least one of timings at which the entry section transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

  According to the feature S5, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion of the (N + 1) game balls can be made different for each control mode, so that diversification of games can be achieved. it can.

[Feature S6]
The gaming machine according to feature S5,
Display means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means (general drawing unit 38)
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means,
A gaming machine, wherein the time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion.

  According to the feature S6, the display unit can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the first game ball, which has passed through the passing unit and triggered the lottery, reaches the ball entry unit. . The control means starts the control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, so that the first game ball which has passed through the passing section and which has triggered the lottery is entered into the ball entry section. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing of reaching.

  For example, the control unit can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passing unit reaches the ball entry unit and the ball entry unit is in the second state at the timing.

[Feature S7]
The gaming machine according to feature S7,
After the game ball has passed through the passing section, the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passed through the passing section is displayed by the display means, and the ball entry section is in the second state. The time before the transition to
A gaming machine, wherein the time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion.

  According to the feature S7, the control means can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passage portion reaches the ball entry portion at which the ball entry portion is in the second state. Become.

[Feature S8]
The gaming machine according to feature S7,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is formed by the incoming ball. At the timing of reaching the part, the entering ball part is in the second state, and at all the timings at which the N game balls distributed to the second route reach the entering part, A first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) which is a first state;
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is formed by the incoming ball. At the timing when the ball reaches the ball, at which the ball is in the second state, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second route reaches the ball. A second control mode (the second high-frequency support mode and the third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball-in section is in the second state;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature S8, a first control mode in which the first game ball enters the ball entry section but N game balls do not enter the ball entry section, and the first game ball enters the ball entry section The second control mode in which at least one of the N game balls entering the ball enters the ball entry section can realize the second control mode, so that the game can be given inflection, It is possible to improve the interest of the people.

[Feature S9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S8,
The second route is constituted by a plurality of routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distributing means includes an alternating distributing mechanism (a first alternating distributing mechanism 304 and a second alternating distributing mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for alternately distributing a game ball to one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

  According to the feature S9, the function of distributing the reached one game ball to the first route and distributing the N game balls arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route is provided by an electronic function. Compared to a configuration realized using control or the like, the configuration can be realized with a simple configuration. In addition, as a configuration for realizing the function using electronic control or the like, for example, the number of reached game balls is measured using a counter or the like, and a game ball that is driven by an electric force is used. Can be cited.

[Feature S10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S9,
A third route (route R2 in Example 4 in FIG. 84) configured such that the sorted gaming balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
The distributing means includes:
While arriving one game ball is distributed to the first route (the route R111 in Example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least N game balls among a plurality of game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route (the routes R12 and R112 in Example 4 of FIG. 84).
Distributing at least one of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route to the third route,
It is configured to distribute a game ball distributed to the second route and one game ball arrived after the game ball distributed to the third route to the first route,
The third path is configured such that the sorted game balls cannot enter the ball entry section even when the ball entry section is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature S10, since the distributed game ball is provided with the third path configured so as not to be able to enter the ball entry portion, the game can be further diversified. For example, by configuring so that a large number of game balls are distributed to the third route, the number of game balls entering the ball entry section can be reduced.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry portion (a second starting port 208a in the tenth embodiment) into which game balls flowing through the game area can enter,
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the tenth embodiment) through which game balls flowing through the game area can pass;
The state of the entering ball section is defined as a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entering ball section, and a state in which a game ball can enter or enter the entering ball section. State transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) for transitioning to a second state which is a state,
Control means for controlling the state transition means in response to a game ball passing through the passing section;
With
The control means includes:
On the basis of the gaming state (in the tenth embodiment, the result of the electric accessory opening lottery and the type of the support mode)
A transition start waiting time, which is a time from when the game ball passes through the passing section to when the entering ball section starts transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the transition start waiting time). It is possible to set the length of (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) to a plurality of types of lengths.
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, a predetermined time (in the tenth embodiment, 1.2 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206). A game machine characterized in that the number of game balls entering the ball entry section per second (FIGS. 87 and 89) depends on the length of the transition start waiting time set by the control means.

  According to the feature T1, the number of game balls entering the ball entry section can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, so that inflection can be added to the game and the interest of the game can be improved. be able to. Further, according to the feature T1, for example, even when the time during which the ball entry section maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition is made. If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the number of game balls entering the ball entry section can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to Feature T1,
Lottery execution means (processing shown in step S5109 in FIG. 91) for executing a lottery when a game ball passes through the passing section;
Display means (general-purpose unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
With
The control means includes:
Based on the gaming state (in the tenth embodiment, the result of the motorized character opening lottery)
The time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the opening and closing of the open / close door 208b) A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the (standby time) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths.

  According to the feature T2, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from when the game ball passes through the passing section until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. And the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the opening / closing door 208b). Open standby time). Therefore, according to the feature T2, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is a lottery, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry section starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening time of the opening / closing door 208b) is set to a plurality of types. By setting the length, the transition start waiting time (variable time of the general-purpose unit 38 + opening time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to a plurality of lengths. That is, according to the feature T2, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening time of the opening / closing door 208b). Can be changed to change the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b), and also change the number of game balls entering the entry part. Can be.

[Feature T3]
The gaming machine according to Feature T1 or Feature T2,
The entering ball section is configured such that when in the second state, a game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the ball,
The control means includes:
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means (variation of the general figure unit 38) Time,
After the game ball passes through the passing portion, set to a time shorter than the time until the game ball reaches the ball entry portion,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature T3, the display unit can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the passing part and triggered the lottery reaches the ball entry part. As a result, the control unit sets the ball entry unit after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display unit and before the timing at which the game ball that has passed the passing unit and triggered the lottery reaches the ball entry unit. To start the transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the game ball that triggered the transition of the entering ball portion to the second state (the game ball that passed the passing portion and triggered the lottery) enters the entering ball portion that transitioned to the second state. It is possible to do.

[Feature T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T3,
The entering ball section is configured such that a game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the entering ball section when the entering ball section is in the second state,
The control means includes:
The transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the entering ball portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the transition start waiting time). (The fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) is set to a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion. Control and
The transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the entering ball portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the transition start waiting time). (Variation time of the drawing unit 38 + open standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) is set to a time longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion. Control and
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature T4, when the first control is executed, the entering ball portion has transitioned to the second state at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the entering ball portion. The game ball that has passed through the ball enters the ball entry portion, while the second control is executed, the game ball that has passed through the passage portion reaches the ball entry portion and the ball portion still enters the ball entry portion at the timing. Since the state has not transitioned to the state 2, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion does not enter the ball entry portion. That is, according to the feature T4, by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the entry section, so that it is possible to add inflection to the game and to enhance the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature T5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T4,
Distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the tenth embodiment) for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of routes;
A first route (route R1 in the tenth embodiment) configured so that the sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion;
A second route (route R2 in the tenth embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
With
The distributing means includes:
While arriving gaming balls are distributed to the first route,
Distributing game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first path to the second path,
A game ball that arrives after a game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first path and the second path are such that the sorted game balls can enter the ball entry section when the ball entry section is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being constituted.

  According to the feature T5, the game balls allocated to the first route (hereinafter, also referred to as first game balls) can pass through the passing portion and the entering ball portion is in the second state. In some cases, it is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, a game ball that arrives after the first game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a second game ball) is distributed to the second route, so that it cannot pass through the passing portion and enters the ball. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first and second game balls enters the ball entry portion. Whether or not the first ball and the second game ball each reach the ball entry portion depends on whether or not the ball entry portion is in the second state. Therefore, the game that enters the ball entry portion while the number of the game balls that may pass through the passage portion among the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) is set to one. The number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball entry part. Then, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) enters the ball entry portion. This can be realized by a series of controls triggered by passing through the passage section.

Further, according to the feature T5, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths when the first game ball has passed through the passing portion. A transition start waiting time at which both the first game ball and the second game ball enter the ball entry section (control in the case of winning the first-class electric utility release in the tenth embodiment) (FIG. 87)) The transition start waiting time at which only the second game ball out of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) enters the ball entry section is set. (Control in the case of winning the second-class electric utility in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 89)). That is, according to the feature T5, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, the number of game balls entering the ball entry section can be changed, so that intonation can be added to the game, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Feature T6]
The gaming machine according to Feature T5,
The distributing means includes:
While arriving one game ball is distributed to the first route (the route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route (the routes R2 and R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine, wherein one gaming ball arriving after N game balls distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route.

  According to the feature T6, since one game ball is distributed to the first route and N game balls are distributed to the second route, each of the (N + 1) game balls is entered. The control as to whether or not to enter the section can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing section. Further, according to the feature T6, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths when the first game ball passes through the passing section. That is, according to the feature T6, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the entry part of the (N + 1) game balls, Inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature T7]
The gaming machine according to Feature T6,
The second route is configured by N routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distributing means includes an alternating distributing mechanism (a first alternating distributing mechanism 304 and a second alternating distributing mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for alternately distributing a game ball to one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

  According to the feature T7, the function of distributing one arrived game ball to the first route and distributing N game balls arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route is provided by an electronic function. Compared to a configuration realized using control or the like, the configuration can be realized with a simple configuration. In addition, as a configuration for realizing the function using electronic control or the like, for example, the number of reached game balls is measured using a counter or the like, and a game ball that is driven by an electric force is used. Can be cited.

[Feature T8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T5 to T7,
A third route (route R2 in Examples 1 and 4 in FIG. 84) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
The distributing means includes:
While arriving one game ball is distributed to the first route (the route R11 in the example 1 of FIG. 84, the route R111 in the example 4 of FIG. 84),
84. At least one of the plurality of game balls reaching after the game ball distributed to the first route is transferred to the second route (the route R12 in the example 1 of FIG. 84 and the route R in the example 4 of FIG. 84). R12 and route R112),
Distributing at least one of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route to the third route,
It is configured to distribute a game ball distributed to the second route and one game ball arrived after the game ball distributed to the third route to the first route,
The third path is configured such that the sorted game balls cannot enter the ball entry section even when the ball entry section is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature T8, since the distributed game ball is provided with the third route configured so as not to be able to enter the ball entry portion, the game can be further diversified. For example, by configuring so that a large number of game balls are distributed to the third route, the number of game balls entering the ball entry section can be reduced.

<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry portion (a second starting port 208a (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) into which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
The state of the entering ball section is defined as a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entering ball section, and a state in which a game ball can enter or enter the entering ball section. State transition means (open / close door 208b (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning to the second state, which is a state;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls having entered the ball entry section;
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls flowing through the game area can pass;
Lottery executing means for executing a lottery based on that the game ball has passed through the passing portion,
Display means for starting the variable display of the identification information based on the passing of the game ball by the passing portion, terminating the variable display, and stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means. (Public Figure Unit 38),
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
With
The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means is defined as a throwing rate. If you do
The control means includes:
It has a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
A transition start waiting time from the start of the variable display by the display means to the start of the transition from the first state to the second state (the general-purpose unit in the eleventh embodiment). 38 is set to a different length for each control mode.
A first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1 (a first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
A second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1 (a second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
A third control mode (the third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the pitching rate exceeds 1,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature U1, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, and the pitching rate in which the pitching rate is 1 Since the third control mode exceeding the third control mode can be executed, it is possible to add inflection to the game and to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature U1, for example, even when the time during which the ball entry section maintains the second state (the time during which the opening / closing door 208b is opened in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition is made. If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the above-described three control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to Feature U1, wherein
An alternate distributing means (alternate distributing mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to two paths;
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured so that the sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion;
A second route (route R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
With
The alternate distribution means,
While allocating one reached game ball to the first route,
Distributing one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route,
One game ball arrived after the game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first path and the second path are such that the sorted game balls can enter the ball entry part when the ball entry part is in the second state. Is composed of
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, the number of the game balls entering the ball input portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. A game machine that varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

  According to the feature U2, with a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution means, a first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, The third control mode in which the throwing rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, since a mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the gaming area can be effectively utilized such as arranging another character in an empty gaming area.

[Feature U3]
The gaming machine according to Feature U1 or Feature U2,
The control means includes:
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment). The length of the opening standby time of the game machine can be set to a different length for each control mode.

  According to the feature U3, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from when the game ball passes through the passing section until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. And the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the opening / closing door 208b). Open standby time). Therefore, according to the feature U3, the time from the passing of the game ball through the passing portion to the display of the result of the lottery by the display means (the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is a lottery time, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry section starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening time of the opening / closing door 208b) is different. , It is possible to set the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) to a different length. That is, according to the feature U3, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry unit starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening time of the opening / closing door 208b). Can be changed to change the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b), and also change the number of game balls entering the entry part. Can be. As a result, it is possible to realize the first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, and the third control mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1. It becomes possible.

<Characteristic V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature V1]
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry section (a second starting port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which game balls flowing through the game area can enter,
The state of the entering ball section is defined as a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entering ball section, and a state in which a game ball can enter or enter the entering ball section. State transition means (open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning to a second state, which is a state,
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls having entered the ball entry section;
A lottery execution unit for a ball entry unit that executes a lottery for the ball entry unit based on that a game ball has entered the ball entry unit,
The variable display of the identification information is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry section, and the variable display is terminated and the result of the ball entry section lottery by the ball entry section lottery executing means is ended. Entry part lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for stopping and displaying the corresponding identification information;
Special game state shifting means for shifting to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) in which a bonus is given to the player based on a result of the lottery lottery being a predetermined result (various jackpots),
Starting means for starting a high-probability lottery mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability of the result of the ball-entry-unit drawing being the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved;
Ending means for ending the high-probability lottery mode;
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls flowing through the game area can pass;
Passing part lottery executing means for executing a lottery for the passing part based on that the game ball has passed through the passing part,
The variable information of the identification information is started based on the passing of the game ball by the passing section, and the variable information is ended and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing section by the lottery executing section for the passing section is finished. Means for displaying a lottery result for the passing section for stopping the display (general figure unit 38);
Control means for controlling the state transition means on the basis of the result of the lottery for the passing part by the lottery executing means for the passing part, so that the entering ball part transitions from the first state to the second state. ,
With
The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means is defined as a throwing rate. If you do
The control means includes:
It has a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
A first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1 (a first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
A second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1 (a second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
A third control mode (the third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the pitching rate exceeds 1,
Is executable,
In the first control mode, the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the first result (4R normal big hit A (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various big hits). And the number of times the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the first control mode is started is the result of the lottery for the ball entry section being the predetermined result (various jackpots). End based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times)
The second control mode is that the result of the lottery for the entry section is the second result (the 8R certain-variable big hit in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 97)) among the predetermined results (various big hits). And ends based on the result of the lottery lottery executed after the second control mode is started being the predetermined result (various jackpots),
In the third control mode, the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the third result (4R normal big hit B (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various big hits). And if the number of times of the ball entry lottery executed after the third control mode is started is the result of the ball entry lottery being the predetermined result (various jackpots) End based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times)
The high-probability lottery mode is started based on a result of the lottery lottery for the entry section being the second result (8R probability change big hit) of the predetermined result, and is executed in the high-probability lottery mode. The process ends when the result of the lottery for the entry ball section is the first result (4R normal jackpot A) or the third result (4R normal jackpot B) among the predetermined results. Gaming machine to do.

  According to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the first result (4R normal jackpot A), the high-probability lottery mode is not started, but the first control mode (the first high-frequency support mode) is set. Be started. When the first control mode is started, the entry of game balls into the entry section is promoted, and the execution of the entry section lottery is promoted. However, since the pitching rate in the first control mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first control mode ends when the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry unit reaches the specified number (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the ball entry unit becoming a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player wants to obtain a predetermined result (various big hits) in the lottery for the ball entry section before the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section reaches the specified number of times and the first control mode ends. Play while expecting. Further, the player plays the game while expecting a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the lottery for the entry section as early as possible in order to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand.

  Furthermore, according to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the second result (8R probability change big hit), the high probability lottery mode is started and the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode) is started. ) Is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes a predetermined result (various big hits) is improved. Further, when the second control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the entry section lottery is promoted. Since the pitching rate in the second control mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Then, the high-probability lottery mode is continued at least until the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes a predetermined result (various big hits). Further, the second control mode is continued until the result of the lottery for the ball entry unit reaches a predetermined result (various big hits). Therefore, the player continues the high-probability lottery mode and the second control mode until a predetermined result (various jackpots) is obtained in the lottery for the ball entry section, and the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is the second result. (8R probable jackpot) and play the game while expecting the high probability lottery mode to be continued. In addition, since the number of game balls in hand does not increase or decrease, the player can concentrate his or her mind on the type of the result when the result of the lottery for the ball entry unit becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots).

  Further, according to the feature V1, if the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the third result (4R normal jackpot B), the high probability lottery mode is not started, but the third control mode (the third high frequency support mode) ) Is started. When the third control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the entry section lottery is promoted. Then, since the pitching rate in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third control mode is ended when the number of executions of the ball entry unit lottery reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the ball entry unit lottery becoming a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player continues the third control mode until immediately before the number of executions of the lottery for the entry section reaches the specified number and increases the number of game balls on hand, but ends the third control mode. A game is played while expecting that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) before. Then, even if the result of the lottery for the ball entry unit does not become the predetermined result (various big hits) before the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry unit reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player: It is possible to obtain a feeling of satisfaction that the third control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues for the longest period.

  As described above, according to the feature V1, it is possible to create a new game property of effectively giving the player various expectations by using the three control modes, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to Feature V1, wherein
The ball entry unit lottery result display means comprises a ball entry unit variation time setting unit that sets the length of the ball entry unit variation time, which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the ball entry unit lottery result display unit,
The ball entry unit variable time setting means,
During the period when the third control mode is being executed,
A gaming machine, wherein a longer time is set as the variation time for the ball entry section as the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the start of the third control mode is increased.

  According to the feature V2, as the number of times the lottery for lottery section is executed approaches the specified number, the set fluctuation time for the lottery section becomes longer. Be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frustration of the player such that the result of the lottery for the ball entry unit does not become a predetermined result even though the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry unit is approaching the specified number.

[Feature V3]
The gaming machine according to Feature V1 or Feature V2,
The ball entry unit lottery result display means comprises a ball entry unit variation time setting unit that sets the length of the ball entry unit variation time, which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the ball entry unit lottery result display unit,
The ball entry unit lottery execution means,
Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if a predetermined condition (reach occurrence condition) is satisfied, a condition satisfaction result (miss result (reach result) Is determined), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (a departure result (reach is not generated)),
The ball entry unit variable time setting means,
During the period when the third control mode is being executed,
The length of the variation time for the ball entry section corresponding to the ball entry section lottery in which the result of the ball entry section lottery becomes the condition satisfaction result (outcome result (reach occurrence)),
The result of the ball-drawing lottery for which the result of the ball-drawing part lottery corresponding to the ball-drawing part lottery corresponding to the condition non-satisfaction result (missing result (non-reach occurrence)) is:
A gaming machine characterized by being set for a long time.

  According to the feature V3, when the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is a condition fulfillment result (outcome result (reach occurrence)), the condition is not fulfilled result (outcome result (reach non-occurrence)). Also, a long variation time is set as the variation time for the entry section. The greater the number of times that the long variation time is set as the variation time for the entry section, the longer the time required for the number of executions of the lottery for the entry section to reach the specified number. As a result, the period during which the third control mode is continued is also prolonged, so that the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases is also prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times that the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the condition satisfaction result (outcome result (reach occurrence)) increases, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature V4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features V1 to V3,
The control means includes:
A transition start waiting time (from the time when the display means starts the variable display to the time when the entry section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (in the eleventh embodiment, a general drawing unit) 38 is set to a different length for each control mode.
The first control mode (the first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
The second control mode (the second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
The third control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature V4, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, and the pitching rate in which the pitching rate is 1 Since the third control mode exceeding the third control mode can be executed, it is possible to add inflection to the game and to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature V4, for example, even when the time during which the ball entry unit maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition is performed. If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the above-described three control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature V5]
The gaming machine according to Feature V4,
An alternate distributing means (alternate distributing mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to two paths;
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured so that the sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion;
A second route (route R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
With
The alternate distribution means,
While allocating one reached game ball to the first route,
Distributing one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route,
One game ball arrived after the game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first path and the second path are such that the sorted game balls can enter the ball entry part when the ball entry part is in the second state. Is composed of
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, the number of the game balls entering the ball input portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. A game machine that varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

  According to the feature V5, the first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1 and the second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, The third control mode in which the throwing rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, since a mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the gaming area can be effectively utilized such as arranging another character in an empty gaming area.

[Feature V6]
The gaming machine according to Feature V4 or Feature V5,
The control means includes:
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment). The length of the opening standby time of the game machine can be set to a different length for each control mode.

  According to the feature V6, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. And the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the opening / closing door 208b). Open standby time). Therefore, according to the feature V6, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (variation time of the ordinary figure unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is a lottery time, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry section starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening time of the opening / closing door 208b) is different. , It is possible to set the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) to a different length. That is, according to the feature V6, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the entry section starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening time of the opening / closing door 208b). Can be changed to change the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b), and also change the number of game balls entering the entry part. Can be. As a result, it is possible to realize the first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, and the third control mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1. It becomes possible.

<Characteristic W group>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry section (a second starting port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which game balls flowing through the game area can enter,
The state of the entering ball section is defined as a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entering ball section, and a state in which a game ball can enter or enter the entering ball section. State transition means (open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning to a second state, which is a state,
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls having entered the ball entry section;
A lottery execution unit for a ball entry unit that executes a lottery for the ball entry unit based on that a game ball has entered the ball entry unit,
The variable display of the identification information is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry section, and the variable display is terminated and the result of the ball entry section lottery by the ball entry section lottery executing means is ended. Entry part lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for stopping and displaying the corresponding identification information;
Special game state shifting means for shifting to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) in which a bonus is given to the player based on a result of the lottery lottery being a predetermined result (various jackpots),
Starting means for starting a high-probability lottery mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability of the result of the ball-entry-unit drawing being the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved;
Ending means for ending the high-probability lottery mode;
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls flowing through the game area can pass;
Passing part lottery executing means for executing a lottery for the passing part based on that the game ball has passed through the passing part,
The variable information of the identification information is started based on the passing of the game ball by the passing section, and the variable information is ended and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing section by the lottery executing section for the passing section is finished. Means for displaying a lottery result for the passing section for stopping the display (general figure unit 38);
Control means for controlling the state transition means on the basis of the result of the lottery for the passing part by the lottery executing means for the passing part, so that the entering ball part transitions from the first state to the second state. ,
With
The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means is defined as a throwing rate. If you do
The control means includes:
It has a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
A game ball non-increase control mode (the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitching rate is 1 or less;
A game ball increase control mode (the third high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitching rate exceeds 1,
Is executable,
In the game ball non-increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the entry section is the first result (the 10R certain-variable big hit A and the 10R certain-variable big hit B (FIG. 98) of the twelfth embodiment) among the predetermined results (various big hits). )), And the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the game ball non-increase control mode is started is determined by the result of the lottery for the ball entry section being the predetermined number. It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without the result (various jackpots),
In the gaming ball increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the entering ball portion is a second result (10R certain variation big hit C (FIG. 98) in the twelfth embodiment) among the predetermined results (various big hits). And the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the game ball increase control mode is started, if the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is the predetermined result (various jackpots) End based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times)
The high-probability lottery mode is based on the fact that the result of the lottery for the entry section is the first result (10R probability change big hit A, 10R probability change big hit B) or the second result (10R probability change big hit C). The number of times the lottery lottery executed after the high-probability lottery mode was started is the specified number of times without the result of the lottery lottery being the predetermined result (various big hits). (100) A gaming machine, which ends when it reaches 100 times.

  According to the feature W1, when the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the first result (10R probability change jackpot A or 10R probability change jackpot B), the high probability lottery mode is started and the game ball non-increase control mode (the The first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes a predetermined result (various big hits) is improved. Further, when the game ball non-increase control mode is started, the entry of the game ball to the entry section is promoted, and therefore the execution of the entry section lottery is promoted. However, since the pitching rate in the game ball non-increase control mode is 1 or less, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase. In the high probability lottery mode and the game ball non-increase control mode, the number of executions of the ball entry unit lottery is reduced to a specified number (100 times) without the result of the ball entry unit lottery being a predetermined result (various jackpots). It ends when it reaches. Therefore, the player obtains a predetermined result (various big hits) in the ball-drawing unit lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the ball-drawing unit lottery reaches the specified number and the high-probability lottery mode ends. Play the game while expecting it to be.

  Further, according to the feature W1, when the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the second result (10R probability variation big hit C), the high probability lottery mode is started, and the game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support Mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes a predetermined result (various big hits) is improved. In addition, when the game ball increase control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the entry section lottery is promoted. Further, since the throwing rate in the game ball increase control mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode, the number of executions of the lottery for the entering part reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the entering part becoming a predetermined result (various jackpots). Then it ends. Therefore, while the player continues the game ball increase control mode until just before the number of times of execution of the lottery for the ball entry unit reaches the specified number and increases the number of game balls on hand, the number of times of execution of the lottery for the ball entry unit is specified. Before the high probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode are completed after the number of times is reached, a game is performed while expecting that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section will be a predetermined result (various jackpots). Then, even if the result of the lottery for the ball entry unit does not become the predetermined result (various big hits) before the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry unit reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player: The satisfaction that the game ball increase control mode in which the number of game balls increases is continued for the longest period can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the feature W1, it is possible to create a new game property that gives the player various expectations in a period in which the high-probability lottery mode limited to the specified number of times is being executed. Amusement can be improved.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to Feature W1,
The ball entry unit lottery result display means comprises a ball entry unit variation time setting unit that sets the length of the ball entry unit variation time, which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the ball entry unit lottery result display unit,
The ball entry unit variable time setting means,
In the period in which the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
A gaming machine, wherein a longer time is set as the variation time for the ball entry section as the number of times of the ball entry section lottery executed after the game ball increase control mode is started is increased.

  According to the characteristic W2, as the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry unit approaches the specified number, the set fluctuation time for the ball entry unit becomes longer, so that the period during which the game ball increase control mode in which the number of game balls increases is continued is continued. Be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frustration of the player such that the result of the lottery for the ball entry unit does not become a predetermined result even though the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry unit is approaching the specified number.

[Feature W3]
The gaming machine according to Feature W1 or Feature W2,
The ball entry unit lottery result display means comprises a ball entry unit variation time setting unit that sets the length of the ball entry unit variation time, which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the ball entry unit lottery result display unit,
The ball entry unit lottery execution means,
Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if a predetermined condition (reach occurrence condition) is satisfied, a condition satisfaction result (miss result (reach result) Is determined), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (a departure result (reach is not generated)),
The ball entry unit variable time setting means,
In the period in which the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
The length of the variation time for the ball entry section corresponding to the ball entry section lottery in which the result of the ball entry section lottery becomes the condition satisfaction result (outcome result (reach occurrence)),
The result of the ball-drawing lottery for which the result of the ball-drawing part lottery corresponding to the ball-drawing part lottery corresponding to the condition non-satisfaction result (missing result (non-reach occurrence)) is:
A gaming machine characterized by being set for a long time.

  According to the feature W3, when the result of the lottery for the entry section is a condition satisfaction result (outcome result (reach occurrence)), the condition is not satisfied result (outcome result (reach non-occurrence)). Also, a long variation time is set as the variation time for the entry section. The greater the number of times that the long variation time is set as the variation time for the entry section, the longer the time required for the number of executions of the lottery for the entry section to reach the specified number. As a result, the period during which the game ball increase control mode continues is longer, and the period during which the player has more game balls is also longer. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times that the result of the lottery for the entry section becomes the condition satisfaction result (outcome result (reach occurrence)) increases, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature W4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to W3,
The control means includes:
A transition start waiting time (from the time when the display means starts the variable display to the time when the entry section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (in the eleventh embodiment, a general drawing unit) 38 is set to a different length for each control mode.
The game ball non-increase control mode (the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment);
The game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature W4, by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to execute the game ball non-increase control mode in which the throwing rate is 1 or less and the game ball increasing control mode in which the throwing rate exceeds 1 Since it is possible, intonation can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the feature W4, for example, even when the time during which the ball entry section maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the twelfth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition is performed. By changing the length of the start waiting time, the above-described two control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature W5]
The gaming machine according to Feature W4,
Alternate distributing means (alternate distributing mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to two paths;
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70)) configured so that the sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion;
A second route (route R2 (FIG. 70)) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
With
The alternate distribution means,
While allocating one reached game ball to the first route,
Distributing one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route,
One game ball arrived after the game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first path and the second path are such that the sorted game balls can enter the ball entry part when the ball entry part is in the second state. Is composed of
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, the number of the game balls entering the ball input portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. A game machine that varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

  According to the feature W5, the game ball non-increase control mode in which the throwing rate is 1 or less and the game ball increasing control mode in which the throwing rate exceeds 1 are provided by a simple configuration using only one alternate sorting means. Can be performed. That is, since a mechanism for executing the two control modes can be realized in a small space, the gaming area can be effectively used, such as arranging another character in an empty gaming area.

[Feature W6]
The gaming machine according to Feature W4 or Feature W5,
The control means includes:
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the opening / closing door 208b in the twelfth embodiment). The length of the opening standby time of the game machine can be set to a different length for each control mode.

  According to the feature W6, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from when the game ball passes through the passing section until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. And the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the opening / closing door 208b). Open standby time). Therefore, according to the feature W5, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is a lottery time, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry section starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening time of the opening / closing door 208b) is different. , It is possible to set the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) to a different length. That is, according to the feature W5, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the entry section starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening time of the opening / closing door 208b). Can be changed to change the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b), and also change the number of game balls entering the entry part. Can be. As a result, it is possible to realize a game ball non-increase control mode in which the throwing rate is 1 or less and a game ball increasing control mode in which the throwing rate exceeds 1.

[Feature W7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to W6,
The control means includes:
As the game ball non-increase mode (the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitching rate is 1 or less,
A game ball decrease control mode (the first high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitching rate is less than 1,
A game ball maintenance control mode in which the pitching rate is 1 (second high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature W7, when the game ball reduction control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, and the execution of the entry section lottery is promoted. However, since the pitching rate in the game ball reduction control mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the lottery for the entry section as early as possible in order to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand. As described above, according to the feature W7, various expectations can be given to the player, so that the interest of the game ball can be improved.

<Character X group>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry section (a second starting port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which game balls flowing through the game area can enter,
The state of the entering ball section is defined as a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entering ball section, and a state in which a game ball can enter or enter the entering ball section. State transition means (open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning to a second state, which is a state,
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls having entered the ball entry section;
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on that a game ball has entered the entry section,
Entry part lottery execution means for executing the entry part lottery based on the acquired special information,
Starting the variable display of the identification information based on the execution of the ball entry lottery, terminating the variable display, and identifying information corresponding to the result of the ball entry part lottery by the ball entry part lottery executing means. A lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for the entry section for stopping and displaying
An entry section variation time setting section that sets a length of the entry section variation time (a variation time of the special figure unit 37), which is a time during which the identification information is variably displayed on the entry section lottery result display section;
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls flowing through the game area can pass;
Passing part lottery executing means for executing a lottery for the passing part based on that the game ball has passed through the passing part,
The variable information of the identification information is started based on the passing of the game ball by the passing section, and the variable information is ended and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing section by the lottery executing section for the passing section is finished. Means for displaying a lottery result for the passing section for stopping the display (general figure unit 38);
In addition to setting the length of the fluctuating time for the passing section (the fluctuating time of the general-purpose unit 38), which is the time at which the identification information is fluctuated and displayed on the lottery result display means for the passing section, Controlling means for controlling the state transition means on the basis of the result of the lottery execution for the passing section by the lottery executing means for the passing section, so as to cause the entering ball section to transition from the first state to the second state. When,
Variation time table for entry section storing the length of variation time for entry section corresponding to the number of times of execution of the lottery for entry section (table A for special figure unit in thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)) ), And a passing section variation time table storing the length of the passing section variation time corresponding to the number of times the entry section lottery is executed (general-purpose unit table A (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment. )), As a set of tables (variable time table set A for high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102));
With
The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means is defined as a throwing rate. If you do
The control means includes:
A plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means can be executed,
By setting the length of the passing unit variation time to a different length for each control mode,
A first control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 99 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the pitching rate is less than 1;
A second control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 100 of the high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the pitching rate is 1, and
A third control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 101 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the pitching rate exceeds 1,
At least two of the control modes can be executed,
In the case where the entry ball variation time setting means refers to the entry ball variation time table and sets the length of the entry ball variation time,
A gaming machine, wherein the length of the passing section variation time is set with reference to the ball entry section variation time table and the passing section variation time table stored as a set of table groups.

  According to the feature X1, by setting the length of the passing portion variation time (the variation time of the general-purpose unit 38) to a different length for each control mode, the first control in which the throwing rate is less than 1 is set. Since at least two control modes of the mode, the second control mode in which the pitching rate becomes 1, and the third control mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1, can be executed, Amusement can be improved.

  Further, according to the feature X1, the length of the passing section variation time and the length of the entry section variation time are set based on the number of executions of the entry section lottery (game times). Then, the pitching rate changes according to the length of the set passing section fluctuation time. In other words, the ratio of game balls entering the ball entry section changes. Therefore, if the length of the variation time for the ball entry section suitable for the proportion of game balls entering the ball entry section is stored in the variation time table for the ball entry section in advance, lottery for the ball entry section (game times) It is possible to set a variation time for ball entry suitable for the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the ball entry section that changes based on the number of times of execution.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to Feature X1, wherein:
The holding unit for holding the special information acquired from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the end of the stop display by the lottery result display unit for the ball entry unit up to a specified number,
In the variation time table for the ball entry section (table A for special figure unit in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)), when the length of the variation time for the passing section is set, the ball enters the ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by storing a fluctuation time longer than an interval between game balls to be played.

  According to the feature X2, the state where the special information is always stored in the holding storage means can be realized, so that the state where the lottery for the entry section is continuously executed without interruption can be realized.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine according to Feature X1 or Feature X2,
The table storage means stores a plurality of table groups (variable time table sets A and B (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment).
The gaming machine, wherein the control means switches the table group to be referred to when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a small hit is won).

  According to the feature X3, since the table group to be referred to is switched, it is possible to change the variation time for the entry section, the variation time for the passing section, and the exit rate set based on the number of executions of the entry section lottery. . Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature X4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features X1 to X3,
Alternate distributing means (alternate distributing mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to two paths;
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70)) configured so that the sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion;
A second route (route R2 (FIG. 70)) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
With
The alternate distribution means,
While allocating one reached game ball to the first route,
Distributing one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route,
One game ball arrived after the game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first path and the second path are such that the sorted game balls can enter the ball entry part when the ball entry part is in the second state. Is composed of
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per predetermined time is determined by the variation time for the passing portion. A gaming machine characterized by being different depending on the length of the game machine.

  According to the feature X4, the first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, by a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution means, The third control mode in which the throwing rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, since a mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a small space, the gaming area can be effectively utilized, for example, by arranging another character in an empty gaming area.

  The inventions of the above-described feature group A to feature group X solve the following problems.

  BACKGROUND ART In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improvements are made from various viewpoints such as structures and effects for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming.

  Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features will be described.

Pachinko gaming machine: a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and a starting ball provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Part, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry part,
A gaming machine comprising: an acquisition information storage unit configured to store special information acquired by the information acquisition unit when a game ball enters the starting ball entry unit.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: provided with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of pictures is stopped after a predetermined time or a predetermined time has elapsed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be implemented with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in the respective embodiments described in the summary of the invention, the technical features in the modified examples may be used to solve some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, replacement and combination can be performed as appropriate. If the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Exhaust port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 30 ... Game board 31 ... Induction rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 32 ... General winning opening 33 ... First starting opening 34 ... Second starting opening 34a ... Electricity Special accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Thru gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Big winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive 37 ... Special Figure unit 37a ... First result display part 37b ... Second result display part 37c ... First reservation display part 37d ... Second reservation display part 38 ... Public figure unit 39 ... Round Display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Symbol display unit 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out opening 45 ... Main display section 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 .. .First control unit 52 ... Second control unit 53 ... Third control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main Control board 62 ... Main side MPU
63 ... Main ROM
63a ... Pass / fail table storage area 63b ... Distribution table storage area 63c ... Reach determination table storage area 63d ... Display duration table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command information storage area 64 ... Main RAM
64a: Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Holding ball storage area 64b ... Hold information storage area 64c ... Electronic hold area 64d ... Various counter area 64e ... Various flag storage area 67a ... .Various detection sensors 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launching mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Sound Light emission control device 91 ... Audio light emission control board 92 ... Sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound light side ROM
93a ... table confirmation storage table area 93b ... visual notice notice generation table storage area 93c ... visual notice notice announcement effect table storage area 93d ... visual notice notice stop symbol table storage area 93e: Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94: Sound light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage area 94b ... Various counter area 94c ... Lottery counter area 94d ... Presentation notice announcement effect storage area 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
105 ... VDP
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
200 ... second starting port unit 202 ... opening 204 ... alternating distribution mechanism 204a ... center piece 204b ... left piece 204c ... right piece 204d ... rotary shaft 204e ... left side holding part 204f ... right side holding part 206 ... through gate 208 ... opening and closing ball entry device 208a ... second starting port 208b ... opening and closing door 208c ... taxiway 300. ..2nd starting port unit 300B ... 2nd starting port unit 300C ... 2nd starting port unit 300D ... 2nd starting port unit 300E ... 2nd starting port unit 300F ... 2nd starting Mouth unit 302 ... Opening section 304 ... Alternate distribution mechanism (first alternating distribution mechanism)
304a ... central piece 304b ... left piece 304c ... right piece 304d ... rotary shaft 304e ... left holder 304f ... right holder 305 ... second alternate distribution Mechanism 305A ... Third alternate distribution mechanism 305a ... Center piece 305b ... Left piece 305c ... Right piece 305d ... Rotating shaft 305e ... Left holding part 305f ... Right Holder 306 ... Thru gate 308 ... Open / close ball entry device 308a ... Second starting port 308b ... Opening / closing door 308c ... Guiding path

[Form]
Firing means for firing a game ball;
Ball entry means into which the launched game balls can enter,
Passing means through which the fired game balls can pass;
The state of the ball entry means is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball can be entered or easy to enter the ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning to a second state which is a state;
Lottery executing means for executing a lottery triggered by a game ball passing through the passing means,
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery,
Distribution means for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes;
A first route configured to allow the sorted game balls to pass through the passing means;
A second route configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing means;
With
The distribution means,
While arriving gaming balls are distributed to the first route,
Distributing game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first path to the second path,
A game ball that arrives after a game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first path and the second path are such that the sorted game balls can enter the ball entry means when the ball entry means is in the second state. It is configured
A gaming machine characterized by that:

Claims (2)

Firing means for firing a game ball;
A ball entry section into which the launched game balls can enter,
Execution means for executing a ball entry assist mode for assisting entry of a game ball into the entry section,
Payout means for paying out game balls as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section,
A gaming machine comprising:
The ratio of the number of paid out game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval by the firing means is defined as a throwing rate. If you do
The execution means,
N types (n is an integer of 2 or more) of ball entry assist modes having different throwing rates can be executed,
As one of the n types of entry assist modes, at least a game ball decreasing mode in which the throwing rate is less than 1 and a game ball increasing mode in which the throwing rate exceeds 1 can be executed. ,
The exit rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entry assist mode is executed is defined as Mi,
When the ratio of the execution of the i-th ball entry assist mode to the execution of the ball entry assist mode is defined as Pi,
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized by being configured to satisfy the following. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The gaming machine, wherein the execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the game ball increasing modes having different throwing rates.